Product Description(V100R006 01)
-
Upload
xuan-truong -
Category
Documents
-
view
76 -
download
1
Transcript of Product Description(V100R006 01)
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
V100R006
Product Description
Issue 01
Date 2008-12-20
Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Network Application ................................................................................................................1-1
2 Functions......................................................................................................................................2-12.1 Electrical-Signal-Cored Bandwidth Switching Function................................................................................2-22.2 Capacity ..........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................2-22.2.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Service Type ...................................................................................................................................................2-32.3.1 Service Type...........................................................................................................................................2-32.3.2 Service Access Capability .....................................................................................................................2-5
2.4 Interface ..........................................................................................................................................................2-52.4.1 Service Interface.....................................................................................................................................2-62.4.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interface ................................................................................................2-6
2.5 Networking......................................................................................................................................................2-72.6 Protection........................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.6.1 Equipment-Level Protection .................................................................................................................2-72.6.2 Network-Level Protection......................................................................................................................2-8
2.7 Clock...............................................................................................................................................................2-82.8 ASON Features ..............................................................................................................................................2-82.9 Integration ......................................................................................................................................................2-92.10 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................................................2-10
2.10.1 ETH-OAM.........................................................................................................................................2-112.10.2 Package Loading ...............................................................................................................................2-112.10.3 TCM...................................................................................................................................................2-122.10.4 Hot Patch ...........................................................................................................................................2-122.10.5 Monitoring of the Power Supply and Environment..........................................................................2-132.10.6 ECC Processing Capability ...............................................................................................................2-132.10.7 Network Management System...........................................................................................................2-132.10.8 OAM Information Exchange..............................................................................................................2-13
3 Hardware Architecture..............................................................................................................3-13.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................3-23.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................3-3
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description Contents
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
3.3 Subrack ...........................................................................................................................................................3-53.3.1 Subrack Structure...................................................................................................................................3-53.3.2 Slot Layout.............................................................................................................................................3-63.3.3 Boards and Their Valid Slots.................................................................................................................3-9
3.4 Boards ...........................................................................................................................................................3-113.4.1 Board Types.........................................................................................................................................3-123.4.2 SDH Interface Unit ..............................................................................................................................3-143.4.3 Ethernet Processing Unit .....................................................................................................................3-163.4.4 Cross-Connect Unit .............................................................................................................................3-163.4.5 System Control and Communication Unit ..........................................................................................3-173.4.6 Clock Processing Unit..........................................................................................................................3-173.4.7 Orderwire Unit.....................................................................................................................................3-183.4.8 System Communication Unit...............................................................................................................3-183.4.9 Power Interface Unit............................................................................................................................3-183.4.10 Electromechanical Information Processing Unit................................................................................3-183.4.11 Key Power Backup Unit.....................................................................................................................3-183.4.12 Dispersion Compensation Unit..........................................................................................................3-193.4.13 Optical Amplifier Unit.......................................................................................................................3-19
4 Software Architecture................................................................................................................4-14.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 Communication Protocols...............................................................................................................................4-24.3 Board Software................................................................................................................................................4-34.4 NE Software....................................................................................................................................................4-34.5 Network Management System........................................................................................................................4-44.6 ASON Software...............................................................................................................................................4-5
5 Ethernet Features .......................................................................................................................5-15.1 Functions.........................................................................................................................................................5-25.2 Application......................................................................................................................................................5-75.3 Protection......................................................................................................................................................5-11
6 DCN Features .............................................................................................................................6-16.1 DCN Overview ...............................................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Background of DCN...............................................................................................................................6-36.1.2 DCN Solution.........................................................................................................................................6-36.1.3 Equipment DCC Allocation...................................................................................................................6-4
6.2 HWECC .........................................................................................................................................................6-56.2.1 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................6-56.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-5
6.3 IP over DCC ...................................................................................................................................................6-76.3.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-76.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-7
6.4 OSI over DCC ................................................................................................................................................6-9
ContentsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
6.4.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-96.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-9
7 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................7-17.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies.........................................................................................................7-3
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links..........................................................................................................7-37.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links..................................................................................................................7-4
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration..................................................................................................................7-57.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration................................................................................................7-67.4 ASON Clock Tracing......................................................................................................................................7-77.5 SLA...............................................................................................................................................................7-107.6 Diamond Services.........................................................................................................................................7-117.7 Gold Services................................................................................................................................................7-157.8 Silver Services...............................................................................................................................................7-177.9 Copper Services.............................................................................................................................................7-197.10 Iron Services................................................................................................................................................7-207.11 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................................7-217.12 Service Association.....................................................................................................................................7-237.13 Service Optimization...................................................................................................................................7-247.14 Service Migration........................................................................................................................................7-247.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................................7-257.16 Preset Restoring Trail..................................................................................................................................7-257.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail....................................................................................................................7-257.18 Shared Risk Link Group..............................................................................................................................7-267.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS...........................................................................................................7-27
8 Configuration and Networking...............................................................................................8-18.1 Equipment Configuration ...............................................................................................................................8-28.2 Typical Networking Application ....................................................................................................................8-3
8.2.1 Networking Topology Structure.............................................................................................................8-48.2.2 Networking for Multi-Granularity Service Grooming, Service Convergence and Bandwidth Switching.........................................................................................................................................................................8-78.2.3 Networking Application of Ethernet Services........................................................................................8-78.2.4 Networking with SDH Equipment to Be the Metropolitan Backbone Node.......................................8-108.2.5 Networking with DWDM Equipment to Be the Supertrunk Backbone Node.....................................8-11
9 Protection ....................................................................................................................................9-19.1 Equipment-Level Protection ..........................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Hot Backup 1+1 Redundancy Protection for Key Functional Modules.................................................9-29.1.2 Protection Against Abnormal Conditions..............................................................................................9-29.1.3 Data Security..........................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2 Network-Level Protection ..............................................................................................................................9-49.2.1 Linear MSP............................................................................................................................................9-49.2.2 Self-Healing Ring Protection.................................................................................................................9-59.2.3 Inter-Ring Interconnection Service Protection.......................................................................................9-7
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description Contents
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
9.2.4 Subnet Connection Protection and Subnet Connection Tunneling Protection.......................................9-89.2.5 Mesh Networking and Rerouting Protection..........................................................................................9-9
9.3 Clock Synchronization Protection ................................................................................................................9-10
10 Clock.........................................................................................................................................10-110.1 Clock Source ..............................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 External Clock Source........................................................................................................................10-210.1.2 Line Clock Source..............................................................................................................................10-210.1.3 Internal Clock Source.........................................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Clock Working Mode .................................................................................................................................10-210.2.1 Locked Mode......................................................................................................................................10-310.2.2 Holdover Mode..................................................................................................................................10-310.2.3 Free-Run Mode..................................................................................................................................10-3
10.3 Clock Outputs..............................................................................................................................................10-310.4 Clock Protection .........................................................................................................................................10-3
10.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled.....................................................................................10-410.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled............................................................................10-510.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled............................................................................10-6
11 OAM ........................................................................................................................................11-111.1 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................................................11-211.2 Network Management.................................................................................................................................11-3
12 Security Management............................................................................................................12-112.1 Authentication Management.......................................................................................................................12-212.2 Authorization Management.........................................................................................................................12-212.3 Network Security Management...................................................................................................................12-212.4 System Security Management.....................................................................................................................12-312.5 Log Management.........................................................................................................................................12-3
12.5.1 NE Security Log Management...........................................................................................................12-412.5.2 Syslog Management...........................................................................................................................12-4
13 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................13-113.1 Interface Type ............................................................................................................................................13-313.2 Optical Interface Performance ....................................................................................................................13-3
13.2.1 Classification of Optical Interfaces....................................................................................................13-413.2.2 Specifications of Optical Interfaces ..................................................................................................13-513.2.3 Frequency Deviation Tolerance at the Input Optical Interface........................................................13-1313.2.4 AIS Rate Deviation Tolerance at the Output Optical Interface........................................................13-1413.2.5 Laser Class ......................................................................................................................................13-14
13.3 Electrical Interface Performance ..............................................................................................................13-1413.3.1 Signal Rate Deviation Tolerance at the Output Interface.................................................................13-1513.3.2 Attenuation Tolerance at the Input Interface....................................................................................13-1513.3.3 Frequency Deviation Tolerance at the Input Interface.....................................................................13-16
13.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance ....................................................................................13-16
ContentsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
13.4.1 Clock Interface Type........................................................................................................................13-1713.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance.......................................................................................13-17
13.5 Auxiliary Interface ...................................................................................................................................13-1713.6 Power Interface ........................................................................................................................................13-1913.7 Alarm Interface.........................................................................................................................................13-2013.8 Protection Performance.............................................................................................................................13-2013.9 Transmission Performance........................................................................................................................13-2213.10 Power Supply Specifications ..................................................................................................................13-2313.11 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards ...........................................................................................13-2313.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............................................................................................................13-2513.13 Safety Standards......................................................................................................................................13-2613.14 Environmental Specification...................................................................................................................13-2713.15 Environment Requirement......................................................................................................................13-28
13.15.1 Environment for Storage................................................................................................................13-2813.15.2 Environment for Transportation.....................................................................................................13-3013.15.3 Environment for Operation............................................................................................................13-33
14 Compliance Standards..........................................................................................................14-114.1 ITU-T Recommendations ...........................................................................................................................14-214.2 IEEE Standards ..........................................................................................................................................14-314.3 IETF Standards ...........................................................................................................................................14-314.4 Environment Related Standards .................................................................................................................14-414.5 EMC Related Standards..............................................................................................................................14-5
15 Basic Principles.......................................................................................................................15-115.1 Introduction to SDH....................................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.1 SDH Levels .......................................................................................................................................15-215.1.2 Multiplexing Structure ......................................................................................................................15-215.1.3 Basic Frame Structure .......................................................................................................................15-315.1.4 SOH Description................................................................................................................................15-315.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description ..........................................................................................15-7
15.2 Introduction to Ethernet..............................................................................................................................15-815.2.1 Basic Technologies............................................................................................................................15-815.2.2 Ethernet Frame Structure...................................................................................................................15-9
15.3 Link Aggregation .......................................................................................................................................15-915.3.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................................15-1015.3.2 Characteristics..................................................................................................................................15-1015.3.3 Link Aggregation Classification......................................................................................................15-10
15.4 QinQ Principle...........................................................................................................................................15-1115.4.1 Introduction to QinQ........................................................................................................................15-1115.4.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure..............................................................................................................15-11
16 Glossary....................................................................................................................................16-1
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description Contents
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
17 Acronyms and Abbreviations..............................................................................................17-1
ContentsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figures
Figure 1-1 Front view of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack......................................................................................1-2Figure 1-2 Rear view of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack.......................................................................................1-3Figure 1-3 Typical networking application of the OptiX OSN 9500...................................................................1-4Figure 3-1 Overall appearance of the OptiX OSN 9500......................................................................................3-2Figure 3-2 Appearance of the T66 cabinet housing the OptiX OSN 9500..........................................................3-3Figure 3-3 Appearance of the N66T cabinet housing the OptiX OSN 9500........................................................3-4Figure 3-4 Overall structure of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack.............................................................................3-6Figure 3-5 Slot allocation of the front slot area of the subrack............................................................................3-7Figure 3-6 Slot allocation of the rear slot area of the subrack..............................................................................3-8Figure 3-7 Inter-board relations.........................................................................................................................3-14Figure 4-1 Software architecture..........................................................................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture...............................................................................................................4-5Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port..................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-2 EVPL service of shared ports.............................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-3 EVPL services isolated by VLAN tags..............................................................................................5-9Figure 5-4 EVPL services isolated by QinQ technology.....................................................................................5-9Figure 5-5 EPLAN service.................................................................................................................................5-10Figure 5-6 EVPLAN service..............................................................................................................................5-11Figure 5-7 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS..............................................................................5-12Figure 5-8 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS....................................................................5-13Figure 6-1 DCN network......................................................................................................................................6-2Figure 6-2 Position of DCC bytes in the SDH overhead.....................................................................................6-3Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC.........................................................................................................6-6Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted from the third party equipment (ECC)........................6-6Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third party equipment (ECC)............................6-7Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third party equipment (IP)................................6-8Figure 6-7 Transparent transmission of OAM information from the third party equipment (IP)........................6-9Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third party equipment (OSI)............................6-10Figure 6-9 Transparent transmission of OAM information from the third party equipment (OSI)...................6-11Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links..........................................................................................................7-3Figure 7-2 Management of control topology.......................................................................................................7-4Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery.......................................................................................................................7-5Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration.......................................................................................................7-6
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description Figures
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
Figure 7-5 Trail restoration..................................................................................................................................7-7Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet............................................................................................................................7-8Figure 7-7 Diamond Services.............................................................................................................................7-12Figure 7-8 Gold services....................................................................................................................................7-16Figure 7-9 A silver service.................................................................................................................................7-18Figure 7-10 Tunnel.............................................................................................................................................7-21Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection..................................................................................................................7-22Figure 7-12 Service association.........................................................................................................................7-23Figure 7-13 Shared mesh restoration trail..........................................................................................................7-26Figure 7-14 LCAS (different path).....................................................................................................................7-27Figure 7-15 LCAS (same path)..........................................................................................................................7-27Figure 8-1 Networking configuration of the OptiX OSN 9500 performing multi-granularity service grooming andservice convergence..............................................................................................................................................8-7Figure 8-2 Point-to-point connection of the GE service......................................................................................8-8Figure 8-3 Layer 2 switching networking for the GE service..............................................................................8-9Figure 8-4 Transparent transmission of GE services ..........................................................................................8-9Figure 8-5 Converging multiple GE services to a 10xGE service ....................................................................8-10Figure 8-6 Network of the OptiX OSN 9500 combined with the OptiX 10G and OptiX 2.5G MADMs.........8-11Figure 8-7 Networking application of the OptiX OSN 9500 and the DWDM equipment.................................8-11Figure 10-1 Clock networking with SSM disabled............................................................................................10-5Figure 10-2 Clock networking with standard SSM enabled..............................................................................10-6Figure 10-3 Clock tracing of intersecting rings with extended SSM enabled....................................................10-7Figure 12-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting.......................................................................12-4Figure 15-1 Multiplexing structure....................................................................................................................15-3Figure 15-2 STM-N frame structure..................................................................................................................15-3Figure 15-3 STM-1 SOH....................................................................................................................................15-4Figure 15-4 STM-4 SOH....................................................................................................................................15-5Figure 15-5 STM-16 SOH..................................................................................................................................15-5Figure 15-6 STM-64 SOH .................................................................................................................................15-6Figure 15-7 Ethernet frame structure ................................................................................................................15-9Figure 15-8 Schematic diagram of link aggregation........................................................................................15-10Figure 15-9 QinQ data frame structure............................................................................................................15-11Figure 15-10 C-TAG TCI structure..................................................................................................................15-12Figure 15-11 S-TAG TCI structure..................................................................................................................15-12
FiguresOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Tables
Table 2-1 Slot access capacity (720 Gbit/s)......................................................................................................... 2-3Table 2-2 Slot access capacity (400 Gbit/s)......................................................................................................... 2-3Table 2-3 Services supported by the OptiX OSN 9500........................................................................................2-4Table 2-4 Maximum access capability of a single OptiX OSN 9500 subrack.....................................................2-5Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the T66 cabinet.........................................................................................3-4Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the N66T cabinet......................................................................................3-5Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack.................................................................. 3-6Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly................................................................................3-6Table 3-5 Slot layout............................................................................................................................................ 3-8Table 3-6 Boards and their valid slots (720 Gbit/s)..............................................................................................3-9Table 3-7 Boards and their valid slots (400 Gbit/s)............................................................................................3-10Table 3-8 Boards................................................................................................................................................3-12Table 3-9 SDH interface unit..............................................................................................................................3-15Table 3-10 Ethernet processing unit...................................................................................................................3-16Table 3-11 Comparison of cross-connect boards for the OptiX OSN 9500.......................................................3-17Table 5-1 Functions and features of the EGT6.....................................................................................................5-2Table 5-2 Functions and features of the EGT6A..................................................................................................5-3Table 5-3 Functions and features of the GE06.....................................................................................................5-4Table 5-4 Functions and features of the EGTH....................................................................................................5-4Table 5-5 Functions and features of the EGS8.....................................................................................................5-5Table 5-6 Functions and features of the EAS1.....................................................................................................5-6Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 9500..................................................................................6-4Table 7-1 Service level.......................................................................................................................................7-10Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services.......................................................................................................7-10Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services............................................................................7-12Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service...............................................................................7-13Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service........................................................................7-14Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services.................................................................................................................7-16Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services................................................................................................................7-18Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services..............................................................................................................7-19Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services..................................................................................................................7-20Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels.........................................................................................................................7-22Table 7-11 Attributes of service association......................................................................................................7-24
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description Tables
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Table 8-1 Board configuration resources............................................................................................................. 8-2Table 8-2 Network topology.................................................................................................................................8-4Table 9-1 Linear MSP parameters........................................................................................................................9-5Table 9-2 MSP ring parameters............................................................................................................................9-7Table 9-3 SNCP parameters.................................................................................................................................9-8Table 9-4 SSM encoding mode..........................................................................................................................9-10Table 10-1 Priority list with the SSM not enabled.............................................................................................10-5Table 10-2 Clock priority list with standard SSM enabled................................................................................10-6Table 10-3 Clock priority list with extended SSM enabled...............................................................................10-7Table 13-1 Interface type....................................................................................................................................13-3Table 13-2 Types of optical interfaces...............................................................................................................13-4Table 13-3 Specifications of STM-1 optical interfaces......................................................................................13-5Table 13-4 Specifications of STM-4 optical interfaces......................................................................................13-6Table 13-5 Specifications of STM-16 optical interfaces....................................................................................13-7Table 13-6 Specifications of STM-64 optical interfaces....................................................................................13-9Table 13-7 Wavelengths for STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces.............................................................13-10Table 13-8 Specifications of STM-16 and STM-64 colored optical interfaces................................................13-11Table 13-9 Specifications of GE and 10xGE optical interfaces.......................................................................13-13Table 13-10 Frequency deviation tolerance at the input interface...................................................................13-13Table 13-11 AIS rate deviation tolerance at the output optical interface.........................................................13-14Table 13-12 Laser class....................................................................................................................................13-14Table 13-13 Signal rate deviation tolerance at the SMB output interface........................................................13-15Table 13-14 Signal rate deviation tolerance at the 1000BASE-T output interface..........................................13-15Table 13-15 Attenuation tolerance at the SMB input interface........................................................................13-16Table 13-16 Attenuation tolerance at the 1000BASE-T input interface..........................................................13-16Table 13-17 Frequency deviation tolerance at the SMB input interface..........................................................13-16Table 13-18 Frequency deviation tolerance at the 1000BASE-T input interface............................................13-16Table 13-19 Clock features of the OptiX OSN 9500.......................................................................................13-17Table 13-20 Timing and synchronization performance....................................................................................13-17Table 13-21 Auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500...............................................................................13-17Table 13-22 Specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces........................................................................13-18Table 13-23 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s codirectional data interface..........................................................13-18Table 13-24 Specifications of RS-232 serial interfaces...................................................................................13-19Table 13-25 Specifications of RS-422 interfaces.............................................................................................13-19Table 13-26 Linear MSP parameters................................................................................................................13-20Table 13-27 MSP ring parameters....................................................................................................................13-21Table 13-28 SNCP parameters.........................................................................................................................13-22Table 13-29 Transmission performance...........................................................................................................13-22Table 13-30 Power supply specifications.........................................................................................................13-23Table 13-31 Power consumption and weight of boards...................................................................................13-23Table 13-32 International EMC standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with......................................13-25Table 13-33 Safety standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with..........................................................13-26
TablesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 13-34 Environment specifications for long-term operation...................................................................13-27Table 13-35 Climate requirements for storage.................................................................................................13-28Table 13-36 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage......................................13-29Table 13-37 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage..........................................13-29Table 13-38 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage.....................................................................13-30Table 13-39 Climate requirements for transportation......................................................................................13-30Table 13-40 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation...........................13-31Table 13-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...............................13-31Table 13-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation..........................................................13-32Table 13-43 Requirements for temperature and humidity................................................................................13-33Table 13-44 Other climate requirements..........................................................................................................13-33Table 13-45 Density requirements for mechanically active substances during operation...............................13-34Table 13-46 Density requirements for chemically active substances during operation...................................13-34Table 13-47 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.................................................................13-35Table 15-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates ....................................................................................15-2Table 15-2 SOH bytes description......................................................................................................................15-6Table 15-3 Description of the VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes.......................................................................15-7Table 15-4 Description of the VC-12 POH bytes...............................................................................................15-7Table 15-5 TPID settings..................................................................................................................................15-12
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description Tables
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
About This Document
OverviewThis document describes the functions, components, performance, and principles of the OptiXOSN 9500 equipment.
This document provides information about the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment based on the productfeatures in terms of network application, functions, hardware/software architecture, datafeatures, and ASON features.
Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 9500 V100R006
Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers
OrganizationThis document consists of sixteen chapters and is organized as follows.
Chapter Content
1 Network Application Describes the features of the OptiX OSN9500, the position of the OptiX OSN 9500 inthe optical transmission network. In addition,describes the roles, key functions, andnetworking application of the OptiX OSN9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description About This Document
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
Chapter Content
2 Functions Describes the hardware and softwarefunctions of the OptiX OSN 9500.
3 Hardware Architecture Describes the hardware and its functionalunits of the OptiX OSN 9500.
4 Software Architecture Describes all types of software of the OptiXOSN 9500 and their relations.
5 Ethernet Features Describes Ethernet boards and typicalEthernet service scenarios of the OptiX OSN9500.
6 DCN Features Describes the DCN features of the OptiXOSN 9500.
7 ASON Features Describes various ASON features and ASONservices of the OptiX OSN 9500.
8 Configuration and Networking Describes the equipment configuration andtypical networking application of the OptiXOSN 9500.
9 Protection Describes the equipment–level protection,network–level protection and clockprotection of the OptiX OSN 9500.
10 Clock Describes the clock of the OptiX OSN 9500,in terms of optional clock sources, clockworking and output modes and how to realizeclock protection switching.
11 OAM Describes the operation, maintenance,network management, and securitymanagement of the OptiX OSN 9500.
13 Technical Specifications Describes various technical specifications ofthe OptiX OSN 9500.
14 Compliance Standards Lists international standards that the OptiXOSN 9500 complies with.
15 Basic Principles Describes the basic concepts and principles ofmultiple important optical transmissiontechnologies.
16 Glossary Lists the terms used in this document.
17 Acronyms and Abbreviations Lists the acronyms and abbreviations used inthis document.
About This DocumentOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, andperformance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or saveyou time.
Provides additional information to emphasize orsupplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. Forexample, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italic.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description About This Document
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
Convention Description
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets andseparated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] * A number of items or no items are selected from two or more items.
GUI Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are inboldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. Forexample, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A meansthe three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keysshould be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly withoutmoving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certainposition.
About This DocumentOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Update HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Based on Product Version V100R006This document of the V100R006 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R005,this version has the following new or optimized content:
Chapter 2 Functions
Descriptions of the lower order cross-connect boards and lower order cross-connect protectiongroups are added.
Descriptions of various protection parameters in the network-level protection are optimized.
Chapter 3 Hardware Architecture
Descriptions of the EGT6A and EGTH boards are added.
Chapter 6 ASON Features
The OVPN and UNI services are added. Descriptions of the ASON integrated with traditionalSDH are added.
Chapter 11 Security Management
Descriptions of various protection parameters in the network-level protection are added.
The organization and content of the document are optimized.
Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R005This document of the V100R005 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R004,this version has the following new or optimized content:
Chapter 3 Hardware
Descriptions of the EGS8 and EAS1 boards are added.
Chapter 9 Protection
Descriptions of the transoceanic MSP ring, SNCTP, and DLAG protection modes are added.Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.
Updates in Issue 03 (2007-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R004This document of the V100R004 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02, issue03 has the following revised or optimized content:
Descriptions of the L64E, O16E, Q16E, D16E and L16E boards are added.
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.
Updates in Issue 02 (2007-02-10) Based on Product Version V100R004This document of the V100R004 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue02 has the following revised or optimized content:
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description About This Document
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.
Updates in Issue 01 (2006-08-10) Based on Product Version V100R004This document of the V100R004 version is of the first release.
Updates in Issue 03 (2006-06-20) Based on Product Version V100R003C02This document of the V100R003C02 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02,issue 03 has the following revised or optimized content:
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.
Updates in Issue 02 (2005-12-20) Based on Product Version V100R003C02The former manual version is T1-040460-20051220-C-1.32.
This document of the V100R003C02 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01,issue 02 has the following revised or optimized content:
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.
Updates in Issue 01 (2005-11-05) Based on Product Version V100R003C02The former manual version is T1-040460-20051105-C-1.31.
This document of the V100R003C02 version is of the first release.
About This DocumentOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
1 Network Application
As an intelligent optical switching platform, the OptiX OSN 9500 is the optical core switching(OCS) equipment. The OptiX OSN 9500 is mainly used in a national trunk network, provincialtrunk network, or MAN trunk network as a node grooming services.
The key functions of the OptiX OSN 9500 are as follows.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 features large switching capacity and flexible networking mode. TheOptiX OSN 9500 provides a maximum of 4608 x 4608 VC-4 higher order cross-connectcapacity, and a maximum of 32256 x 32256 VC-12 (or 1536 x 1536 VC-3) lower ordercross-connect capacity. The OptiX OSN 9500 supports networking schemes, such as thechain, ring and mesh. The OptiX OSN 9500 grooms services in VC-4, VC-3, or VC-12granularities to meet different network application requirements.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 can access multiple services, such as STM-1(E), STM-1(O), STM-4,STM-16, STM-64, GE and 10xGE services.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 has ASON features, such as automatic end-to-end serviceconfiguration, service level agreement (SLA), traffic engineering, mesh networking, andprotection.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 can be used alone or together with other Huawei optical transmissionequipment for networking. In addition, the OptiX OSN 9500 can be interconnected withthe SDH and DWDM equipment of the other vendors, which complies with ITU-TRecommendations.
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the appearance of the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 1 Network Application
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
Figure 1-1 Front view of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack
1 Network ApplicationOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 1-2 Rear view of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack
Figure 1-3 shows typical networking application of the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 1 Network Application
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
Figure 1-3 Typical networking application of the OptiX OSN 9500
Ethernet SANPSTN ATM. . . MicrowaveTechnology
OptiX OSN 9500
Backbonelayer
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 2500OptiX OSN 1500
Convergencelayer
Accesslayer
GSM/CDMA/WCDMA/TD-
SCDMA
OptiX OSN 3500OptiX OSN 3500TOptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 3500OptiX OSN 3500TOptiX OSN 3500 II
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
EthernetStorage Area Network (SAN)
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WDMA)Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA)
Microwave Technology
1 Network ApplicationOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
2 Functions
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the hardware and software functions of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.1 Electrical-Signal-Cored Bandwidth Switching FunctionThis topic describes the bandwidth switching type and cross-connect granularity of the OptiXOSN 9500.
2.2 CapacityThis topic describes the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.3 Service TypeThis topic describes the service type and service access capability of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.4 InterfaceThis topic describes the service interface, administration and auxiliary interface of the OptiXOSN 9500.
2.5 NetworkingThis topic describes the NEs and network topologies of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.6 ProtectionThis topic describes the equipment-level protection and network-level protection of the OptiXOSN 9500.
2.7 ClockThis topic describes the clock performance and feature of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.8 ASON FeaturesThis topic describes the ASON feature of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.9 IntegrationThe equipment integrates multiple functions. A single subrack can groom a maximum of 720Gbit/s higher order and 80 Gbit/s lower order services.
2.10 Operation and MaintenanceThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports the operation, administration, and maintenance functions. Inaddition, the T2000 can be used to operate, maintain and manage the equipment in the entirenetwork.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 2 Functions
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
2.1 Electrical-Signal-Cored Bandwidth Switching FunctionThis topic describes the bandwidth switching type and cross-connect granularity of the OptiXOSN 9500.
As electrical-signal-cored (O-E-O, namely, optical-electrical-optical) bandwidth switchingequipment, the OptiX OSN 9500 can cross-connect services of VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12granularities.
2.2 CapacityThis topic describes the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.2.1 Cross-Connect CapacityThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides large capacity to cross-connect services of multiple granularities.
2.2.2 Slot Access CapacityThe OptiX OSN 9500 uses different types of cross-connect boards. Hence, the slot accesscapacity is different from each other. Before configuring the cross-connect boards and housingthem in the equipment, you must confirm the cross-connect boards used in the equipment.
2.2.1 Cross-Connect CapacityThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides large capacity to cross-connect services of multiple granularities.
The OptiX OSN 9500 can cross-connect multiple higher order and lower order services in a non-blocking manner, depending on the types of the used cross-connect boards.l In the case of the GXCH board, the OptiX OSN 9500 can cross-connect 2560 x 2560 VC-4
higher order services.l In the case of the EXCH board, the OptiX OSN 9500 can cross-connect 4608 x 4608 VC-4
higher order services.l In the case of the GXCL board, the OptiX OSN 9500 can cross-connect 16128 x 16128
VC-12 (or 768 x 768 VC-3) lower order services.l In the case of the EXCL board, the OptiX OSN 9500 can cross-connect 32256 x 32256
VC-12 (1536 x 1536 VC-3) lower order services.In addition, the OptiX OSN 9500 supports flexible service grooming of VC-12, VC-3, or hybridgranularities.
NOTE
To configure and groom lower order services, the OptiX 9500 must be configured with lower order cross-connect boards. When the EXCL board is used, the OptiX OSN 9500 can be configured with two 40 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect protection groups. In each protection group, six VC-4s are used for connectingthe two lower order cross-connect protection groups.
2.2.2 Slot Access CapacityThe OptiX OSN 9500 uses different types of cross-connect boards. Hence, the slot accesscapacity is different from each other. Before configuring the cross-connect boards and housingthem in the equipment, you must confirm the cross-connect boards used in the equipment.
2 FunctionsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 2-1 lists the slot access capacity when the EXCH board of 720 Gbit/s cross-connectcapacity is used.
Table 2-1 Slot access capacity (720 Gbit/s)
Valid Slot Access Capacity
IU01–IU32 20 Gbit/s
IU33–IU40 10 Gbit/s
Table 2-2 lists the slot access capacity when the GXCH board of 400 Gbit/s cross-connectcapacity is used.
Table 2-2 Slot access capacity (400 Gbit/s)
Valid Slot Access Capacity
IU03–IU14 and IU19–IU30 20 Gbit/s
IU01–IU02, IU15–IU18, IU31–IU32, and IU33–IU40 10 Gbit/s
NOTE
When the GXCH board is used, the access capacity supported by each slot is shown in Table 2-2. Theactual access capacity of the GXCH board is 400 Gbit/s. Thus, in application, proper slots should be usedtogether to meet the requirements.
2.3 Service TypeThis topic describes the service type and service access capability of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.3.1 Service TypeThe OptiX OSN 9500 can process the SDH, PDH, and Ethernet services.
2.3.2 Service Access CapabilityThe maximum capacity of a network composed of the OptiX OSN 9500 depends on thetransmission rate of the network, network topology, and protection schemes. The networktopology and protection schemes determine the network bandwidth utilization ratio.
2.3.1 Service TypeThe OptiX OSN 9500 can process the SDH, PDH, and Ethernet services.
The services supported by the OptiX OSN 9500 are as follows:
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 2 Functions
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
Table 2-3 Services supported by the OptiX OSN 9500
Service Type Description
SDH Service l SDH standard services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64
l SDH standard concatenation services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c
l SDH services with the FEC function: 10.709 Gbit/sNOTE
If a lower order service cannot be added due to insufficient concatenation bandwidth,the user can change the current lower order service configuration to a lower ordercross-connect group. Hence, a minimal concatenation bandwidth is used.
When the EXCL cross-connect board is used, two lower order cross-connect protection groups can be configured.l A maximum of two 40 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect protection
groups are supported. In each protection group, six VC-4s are used forconnecting the two lower order cross-connect protection groups.
l Adding a lower order cross-connect protection group does not affect thecurrent lower order service configuration.
l After the two 40 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect protection groups areconfigured, the lower order cross-connect protection groups can bedeleted. Before deleting a lower order cross-connect protection group,the user needs to migrate the services in the lower order cross-connectprotection group to the other lower order cross-connect protection group.
PDH Service Supports the transmitting of the SDH services with PDH services to groomthe PDH services.
EthernetService
l EPL (Ethernet Private Line)
l EVPL (Ethernet Virtual Private Line)
l EPLAN (Ethernet Private LAN)
l EVPLAN (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN)
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports passing lower order services through higher order cross-connectboards. In this case, pay attention to the following points:
l A lower order service automatically disables the higher order pass-through function if thelower order service whose higher order pass-through function is enabled no longer meetsthe higher order pass-through conditions after a new lower order service is configured ora linear MSP group is added. When the higher order pass-through function is disabled, thelower order service is interrupted for less than 50 ms.
l If the current available lower order service capacity does not meet the relevant requirement,the higher order pass-through function cannot be disabled.
l The higher order pass-through function can be configured in the following cases only:
– The source lower order path number of the lower order service is the same as the sinklower order path number of the lower order service.
– A non-broadcast lower order service is available.
– A non-convergency lower order service is available.
2 FunctionsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
– A non-lower order SNCP service is available.
When the higher order pass-through function is enabled, the lower order service isinterrupted for less than 50 ms.
2.3.2 Service Access CapabilityThe maximum capacity of a network composed of the OptiX OSN 9500 depends on thetransmission rate of the network, network topology, and protection schemes. The networktopology and protection schemes determine the network bandwidth utilization ratio.
The processing capability of the cross-connect matrix and the capacity of each interface unit(IU) jointly determine the access capacity of a single OptiX OSN 9500 NE.
Table 2-4 lists the maximum access capability of a single OptiX OSN 9500 subrack.
Table 2-4 Maximum access capability of a single OptiX OSN 9500 subrack
Rate Max. Number
STM-64 72
STM-16 288
STM-4 512
STM-1(O) 512
STM-1(E) 224
GE 560
10GE 24
CAUTIONTable 2-4 lists the maximum access capability for the condition wherein services are accessedat one rate. For actual networking, configure STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, or hybridservices. The overall access capacity, however, should not exceed the maximum cross-connectcapacity of the equipment.In addition to the preceding higher order services, the OptiX OSN 9500 can groom lower orderservices. Up to two 40 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect protection groups can be configured. Ineach protection group, six VC-4s are used for connecting the two lower order cross-connectprotection groups.
2.4 InterfaceThis topic describes the service interface, administration and auxiliary interface of the OptiXOSN 9500.
2.4.1 Service Interface
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 2 Functions
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-5
The OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of service interfaces, including SDH serviceinterfaces and Ethernet data interfaces.
2.4.2 Administration and Auxiliary InterfaceIn addition to the service interfaces, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of auxiliaryinterfaces, synchronous clock interfaces, and power access interfaces.
2.4.1 Service InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of service interfaces, including SDH serviceinterfaces and Ethernet data interfaces.
SDH Service InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of SDH service interfaces, such as the STM-1,STM-4, STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, and the STM-1 electrical interfaces.
l STM-64 optical interface: The STM-64 optical interfaces can be of the I-64.1, S-64.2b,Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-64.2b, V-64.2b, Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and 100 Gbit/s EA types.
l STM-16 optical interface: The STM-16 optical interfaces can be of the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1,L-16.2, L-16.2(je), V-16.2(je), U-16.2(je), and 170, 640.a types.
l STM-4 optical interface: The STM-4 optical interfaces can be of the S-4.1 and L-4.1 types.
l STM-1 optical interface: The STM-1 optical interfaces can be of the S-1.1 and L-1.1 types.
l STM-1 electrical interface: The 75-ohm SMB electrical interface.
Ethernet Data InterfaceThe Ethernet data interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 9500 include the 1000BASE-LX,1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-EX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-T, 10GBASE-LR and10GBASE-ER interfaces.
2.4.2 Administration and Auxiliary InterfaceIn addition to the service interfaces, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of auxiliaryinterfaces, synchronous clock interfaces, and power access interfaces.
Auxiliary InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the following auxiliary interfaces for users.
l One two-wire simulation phone interface, which provides orderwire communication forthe regeneration section (RS) and multiplex section (MS).
l Two two-wire phone network-network interfaces, which are used for orderwirecommunication between two networks that are not connected to each other by fibers.
l One 64 kbit/s F1 data interface, which complies with ITU-T G.703.
l Four asynchronous RS-232/RS-242 data interfaces, which are defined by users.
l Two 100M Ethernet commissioning interfaces and one 100M Ethernet networkmanagement interface. For the two networks that are not connected with fibers, connectthe Ethernet network management interfaces of each network to a router to establish theinter-network DCC communication.
l One commissioning serial port.
2 FunctionsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
l 16 alarm input interfaces (DB50), four alarm output interfaces (DB9), and one alarmconcatenation interface (DB9).
Synchronous Clock InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides external clock input and output interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.703.
l Two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s clock input interfaces
l Two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s clock output interfaces
All clock interfaces are of 75 ohms. If a conversion cable is used, 120-ohm clock interfaces areavailable.
Power Access InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the distributed power access interfaces to access two channelsof separate –48 V or –60 V power. The two channels of access power are of 1+1 hot backup. Inaddition, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides two interfaces to supply power for a hub, which realizesthe 1+1 protection.
2.5 NetworkingThis topic describes the NEs and network topologies of the OptiX OSN 9500.
As optical core switching (OCS) equipment, the OptiX OSN 9500 can be used as a terminalmultiplexer (TM), add/drop multiplexer (ADM), or multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)NE.
The OptiX OSN 9500 can form a network flexibly, because it supports various topologies, suchas the chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection(DNI), hub, or mesh. Among these topologies, the mesh topology can effectively increase thebandwidth utilization rate.
2.6 ProtectionThis topic describes the equipment-level protection and network-level protection of the OptiXOSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 provides a complete mechanism for equipment-level protection andnetwork-level protection.
2.6.1 Equipment-Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides reliable protection schemes at the equipment level for the keyboards and the power module.
2.6.2 Network-Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple protection schemes at the network level, such as linearmultiplex section protection (MSP), MSP ring, and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
2.6.1 Equipment-Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides reliable protection schemes at the equipment level for the keyboards and the power module.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 2 Functions
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-7
The OptiX OSN 9500 provides the following protection schemes at the equipment level.
l 1+1 hot backup for cross-connect boards
l 1+1 hot backup for clock boards
l 1+1 warm backup for SCC boards
l DLAG protection for Ethernet boards
l 1+1 hot backup for PIU boards
l Centralized backup for key power modules of boards
l Mutual backup of two channels of –48 V or –60 V DC working power supplies
NOTE
The 1+1 hot backup of the cross-connect boards is classified into the 1+1 hot backup of higher order cross-connect boards and the 1+1 hot backup of lower order cross-connect boards.When the EXCL board is used, the OptiX OSN 9500 supports two 40 Gbit/s lower order cross-connectprotection groups. In each protection group, six VC-4s are used for connecting the two lower order cross-connect protection groups.
2.6.2 Network-Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple protection schemes at the network level, such as linearmultiplex section protection (MSP), MSP ring, and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
The OptiX OSN 9500 provides self-healing schemes at the network level.
l 1+1 or 1:N (N≤14) linear MSP
l Two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring, two-fiber unidirectional MS dedicatedring, four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring, and transoceanic MSP ring
l SNCP and subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
l Mesh networking and rerouting protection
2.7 ClockThis topic describes the clock performance and feature of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The timing system of the OptiX OSN 9500 provides the function of managing thesynchronization status messaging (SSM). The timing system provides complete synchronousclock management functions and protection switching functions. Excellent clocksynchronization performance helps enhance reliability of network operation.
The timing system can work in the locked mode, holdover mode or free-run mode. When thetiming system works in locked mode, any of the line clock sources or external clock sources canbe used as the reference clock source. The selection of clocks of different priorities and the usageof the S1 byte ensure the reliability of the network timing system. The ASON network not onlysupports the traditional clock locked mode, but also supports the ASON clock locked mode.
The OptiX OSN 9500 uses the crystal of high precision as the internal oscillator, the technicalspecifications of which comply with ITU-T G.813.
2.8 ASON FeaturesThis topic describes the ASON feature of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2 FunctionsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
NOTE
The ASON software can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment according tothe requirements of the customer. If the ASON software is not installed in the OptiX OSN 9500, skip thissection.
The OptiX OSN 9500 is an intelligent optical switching system that provides a stand-aloneASON software system. The ASON software system can be used to allocate bandwidthdynamically and to realize intelligent service routing and configuration functions. This softwaresystem can be easily and flexibly used. In addition, this software system can help increase thenetwork bandwidth utilization ratio.
The ASON provides the following functions:
l Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.
l Supports the SLA.
l Supports the UNI services.
l Provides the optical virtual private network (OVPN) technology.
l Provides traffic engineering control to equalize traffic in the entire network and improvebandwidth utilization.
l Provides distributed mesh networking protection and provide protection for services withreal-time rerouting.
l Supports sectional and end-to-end protection and enhance the network scalability.
2.9 IntegrationThe equipment integrates multiple functions. A single subrack can groom a maximum of 720Gbit/s higher order and 80 Gbit/s lower order services.
The equipment provides 40 service slots, which may not house the optical amplifier board anddispersion compensation board. In this manner, all the service slots can be used.
The equipment can access SDH signals at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, or STM-1 rate. Theequipment also accesses GE and 10GE signals. In addition, the equipment supports VC-4-64c,VC-4-16c, and VC-4-4c concatenation services.
The equipment provides the following line boards and interface boards.
l 1 x STM-64 (outband FEC) line boards
l 1 or 2 x STM-64 line boards
l 1/2/4/8 x STM-16 line boards
l 1 x STM-16 long-haul line boards
l 4 x STM-4 line boards
l 16 x STM-4/STM-1 line boards
l 16 x STM-1 line boards with optical interfaces or electrical interfaces
l 6/8/16 x GE service interface boards
l 1 x 10GE service interface boards
The high integration increases the access capability of the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 2 Functions
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-9
2.10 Operation and MaintenanceThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports the operation, administration, and maintenance functions. Inaddition, the T2000 can be used to operate, maintain and manage the equipment in the entirenetwork.
The cabinet, boards, and functions of the OptiX OSN 9500 are designed according to thecustomer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, theOptiX OSN 9500 provides the powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the following operation, administration, and maintenancecapabilities:
l Alarm and performance management
l ALS function
l Optical power management
l Multiple maintenance methods
l Network management
l Security management
2.10.1 ETH-OAMThis topic describes the ETH-OAM function of the OptiX OSN 9500 and the method and processof realizing the function.
2.10.2 Package LoadingThe software package loading technology of the OptiX OSN 9500 is classified into softwarepackage loading and simulation software package loading.
2.10.3 TCMTandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. When one VC-4 pathpasses multiple networks, the TCM function can be enabled to monitor the bit errors that occuron the path of each network segment.
2.10.4 Hot PatchThis topic describes the feature and application background of the hot patch technologysupported by the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.10.5 Monitoring of the Power Supply and EnvironmentThis topic describes the power supply and environment monitoring function of the OptiX OSN9500.
2.10.6 ECC Processing CapabilityThis topic describes the maximum ECC processing capability of the OptiX OSN 9500.
2.10.7 Network Management SystemThis topic describes the network management system OptiX iManager used by the OptiX OSN9500.
2.10.8 OAM Information ExchangeThis topic describes three modes of network management information communication of theOptiX OSN 9500.
2 FunctionsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
2.10.1 ETH-OAMThis topic describes the ETH-OAM function of the OptiX OSN 9500 and the method and processof realizing the function.
With the development of Ethernet services, the equipment maintainability becomes more andmore important. When Ethernet is extended to the metropolitan area network (MAN) and thewide area network (WAN), the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) of thetransmission network is a key issue to resolve. However, the present maintenance measures atEthernet Layer 2 are very limited. This brings the emergence of the Ethernet OAM (ETH-OAM).
The ETH-OAM has the following functions:
l Automatic fault discovery
l Fault location
l Fault isolation
The Ethernet OAM is realized by using the following methods:
l Loopback (LB) test, which is performed to test the bidirectional connectivity.
l Link tracing (LT) test, which is performed to locate faults.
l Connectivity check (CC) test, which is performed to test the unidirectional connectivity.
l Service loop test, which is performed to test the Ethernet link loop.
l PING function, which is performed to test the inter-network connectivity.
l Performance test, which is performed to randomly test the packet loss ratio in the Ethernetlink and the transmission hold-off time.
Process of realizing the ETH-OAM: The maintenance endpoint (MEP) initiates the faultdetection. When detecting the fault, the maintenance intermediate point (MIP) reports alarmsand events, which can be accurately synchronized to the Ethernet trail relevant to the MIP.
2.10.2 Package LoadingThe software package loading technology of the OptiX OSN 9500 is classified into softwarepackage loading and simulation software package loading.
Software Package Loading
The software package loading is performed to upgrade and manage the NE level software inbatches. The NE level software can then be loaded and activated in batches to simplify theupgrade operation for the NE level software. Also, you can check whether the board softwareversions match when the board is in service. After a board is in service, the board softwareversions can be automatically updated.
The software package loading has the following features:
l Users load the software through a universal operation interface.
l The software package is stored on the SCC board. The NE software is directly placed inthe target directory and the board software is buffered in the CF card. In this way, the boardsoftware can be automatically updated after a new board is inserted. If the board softwarefiles are lost, these files can be restored from the SCC.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 2 Functions
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-11
l The NE can be automatically managed. If the board that is newly inserted does not matchthe software of the NE, automatic update is performed.
l The software package to be loaded needs to be analyzed and confirmed to ensure that acorrect software package is loaded.
l The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load therequired files only.
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:
l Upgrade of software of an NE
l Replacement of service boards
l Replacement of the SCC board
l Replacement of the CF card of an SCC board
Simulation Software Package LoadingWhen a suit of software needs to be loaded to an NE and the mapping relationship between theNE boards and the software is defined according to the simulation software package, you canimprove the loading efficiency by loading a simulation software package.
The simulation software package includes the following files:
l All the necessary files to be loaded at an NE
l The package description files that define the loading attributes of each software type
Loading only the software specified in the description files on the T2000.
The simulation software package loading scheme has the following features:
l Simplifies the complicated upgrade operation.
l Improves the upgrade security.
l Improves the upgrade efficiency.
2.10.3 TCMTandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. When one VC-4 pathpasses multiple networks, the TCM function can be enabled to monitor the bit errors that occuron the path of each network segment.
The TCM function is supported by the L64E, O16E, Q16E, D16E, L16E, D64E, F64E, and L16Lboards.
2.10.4 Hot PatchThis topic describes the feature and application background of the hot patch technologysupported by the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is found in or a newrequirement need be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes withnew codes is performed to solve the defect or realize the new requirement, without any serviceinterruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
2 FunctionsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
The hot patch technology has the following features:
l The hot patch solves most software problems without affecting services.
l The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and avoids frequentsoftware version upgrade.
l The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hotpatch also provides a rollback function. All these help to lower the upgrade cost and toavoid upgrade risks.
l The hot patch can be used as an effective method of locating faults, and thus improves theefficiency of solving problems.
2.10.5 Monitoring of the Power Supply and EnvironmentThis topic describes the power supply and environment monitoring function of the OptiX OSN9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 adopts the distributed power supply scheme to access two separatechannels of –40 V or –60 V power. The equipment can monitor buses, power supply voltageand environment temperature. In this way, the reliable performance is ensured. The equipmentalso has the function to back up the key power supply of boards. With this function, the equipmentbacks up the power supply modules of the line boards, JCOM, JEOW and optical boosteramplifier boards in a centralized manner.
2.10.6 ECC Processing CapabilityThis topic describes the maximum ECC processing capability of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 uses a powerful central processing unit (CPU). Based on the advancedsystem bus structure, the OptiX OSN 9500 can process a maximum of 288 channels of ECCinformation. This capability can meet related requirements of a complex network.
2.10.7 Network Management SystemThis topic describes the network management system OptiX iManager used by the OptiX OSN9500.
The OptiX iManager T2000 is a network management system (NMS) based on the WindowsNT and UNIX operating systems. The T2000 can perform operation, administration,maintenance and Provision (OAM&P) for a complex network composed of the OptiX OSN 9500and other OptiX transmission equipment. The T2000 can also realize configuration andgrooming of trails to ensure the network security.
2.10.8 OAM Information ExchangeThis topic describes three modes of network management information communication of theOptiX OSN 9500.
Any of the following three methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 9500 to transparentlytransmit the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) information of third-partyequipment, or for the third-party equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information ofthe OptiX OSN 9500.
l HWECC
l IP over DCC
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 2 Functions
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-13
l OSI over DCC
2 FunctionsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
2-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
3 Hardware Architecture
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the hardware and its functional units of the OptiX OSN 9500.
3.1 OverviewThis topic describes the hardware structure of the OptiX OSN 9500.
3.2 CabinetThis topic describes the appearance of and technical specifications for the OptiX OSN 9500.
3.3 SubrackThis topic describes the appearance, slots and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 9500subrack.
3.4 BoardsThis topic describes board types, interfaces and board functional units of the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
3.1 OverviewThis topic describes the hardware structure of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 consists of the following parts:
l Cabinet, which contains the DC power distribution unit (PDU), front door, rear door andside panel. The DC PDU mainly access and distributes power.
l Subrack, which contains the fan tray assemblies, boards, air filter and cabling troughs. Thefan tray assemblies are used to dissipate head generated by the equipment. Each subrackshould be configured with two fan tray assemblies.
l Cables, which contain fibers, packages of internal cables and external cables.
l Other optional components, which contain the orderwire phone, hub accessories, andbracket for cabinet installation.
Figure 3-1 Overall appearance of the OptiX OSN 9500
12
3
4
5
1. Cabinet door 2. Cabinet indicator 3. DC PDU
4. Fan tray assembly 5. Subrack
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
3.2 CabinetThis topic describes the appearance of and technical specifications for the OptiX OSN 9500.
The cabinet housing the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with the ETS 300 119 standards. The OptiXOSN 9500 can be installed in the 2000 mm, 2200 mm, or 2600 mm ETSI cabinet, according tothe requirements.
The equipment can be installed in two types of cabinets: T66 and N66T. The cabinet uses frontand rear columns. Both the front door and rear door can be opened on one side. Figure 3-2 showsthe appearance of the T66 cabinet. Figure 3-3 shows the appearance of the N66T cabinet.
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the T66 cabinet housing the OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
Figure 3-3 Appearance of the N66T cabinet housing the OptiX OSN 9500
NOTE
The structure of the T66 cabinet is the same as the structure of the N66T cabinet, except for the doors.
Table 3-1 lists the technical specifications of the T66 cabinet.
Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the T66 cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94
Table 3-2 lists the technical specifications of the N66T cabinet.
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the N66T cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 71
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 76
3.3 SubrackThis topic describes the appearance, slots and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 9500subrack.
3.3.1 Subrack StructureThe OptiX OSN 9500 subrack is divided into the upper part and the lower part. The OptiX OSN9500 also contains the front and rear slot areas. There are 32 slots in the front slot area and 26slots in the rear slot area. The external interfaces of the subrack are available on the front panel.
3.3.2 Slot LayoutThe OptiX OSN 9500 subrack contains the front slot area and rear slot area, which provide 58slots. In the front slot area, 32 slots are available for the service boards. In the rear slot area, slotsIU33 to IU40 house service boards, and the other slots house special boards such as the SCCboards, cross-connect boards, power boards, and auxiliary boards.
3.3.3 Boards and Their Valid SlotsThe mapping relationship between the boards and slots is different when different higher ordercross-connect boards are used.
3.3.1 Subrack StructureThe OptiX OSN 9500 subrack is divided into the upper part and the lower part. The OptiX OSN9500 also contains the front and rear slot areas. There are 32 slots in the front slot area and 26slots in the rear slot area. The external interfaces of the subrack are available on the front panel.
The dimensions of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack are 530 mm (W) x 587 mm (D) x 900 mm (H).The weight of an idle single subrack is 35 kg. The subrack is divided into the upper layer andthe lower layer. Boards can be housed in the front or rear slot area of each layer. The front slotarea has 32 slots and the rear slot area has 26 slots. The entire subrack provides 58 slots. Theexternal interfaces of the subrack are present on the front panels of the boards. Figure 3-4 showsthe overall structure of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
Figure 3-4 Overall structure of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack
34
5
1
2
6
Front view Rear view
1
2
3
6
1. Handle 2. Mounting ear 3. Fan tray assembly
4. System backplane 5. Shelf 6. Cabling area
The backplane in the subrack supplies power to the fan tray assemblies, which are inserted inthe subrack. A single subrack should be configured with two fan tray assemblies.
Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 list the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack andfan tray assembly respectively.
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 9500 subrack
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
530 (W) x 587 (D) x 900 (H) 35
Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
494 (W) x 249 (D) x 64.5 (H) 4.1
3.3.2 Slot LayoutThe OptiX OSN 9500 subrack contains the front slot area and rear slot area, which provide 58slots. In the front slot area, 32 slots are available for the service boards. In the rear slot area, slotsIU33 to IU40 house service boards, and the other slots house special boards such as the SCCboards, cross-connect boards, power boards, and auxiliary boards.
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Front Slot AreaThe front slot area of the subrack houses the service boards. The front slot area of the subrackhas 32 IU slots (IU01–IU32). The front slot area of the upper layer and the front slot area of thelower layer can house 16 boards each. Figure 3-5 shows the slot allocation of the front slot areaof the subrack.
Figure 3-5 Slot allocation of the front slot area of the subrack
IU18
IU17
IU19
IU20
IU21
17
IU22
IU23
IU24
IU25
IU26
IU27
IU28
IU29
IU30
IU31
IU32
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
IU02
IU01
IU03
IU04
IU05
01
IU06
IU07
IU08
IU09
IU10
IU11
IU12
IU13
IU14
IU15
IU16
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Front slot area
Rear Slot AreaThe rear slot area of the subrack has the following 26 slots.
l Eight slots for the IUs (IU33–IU40)
l One slot for the key power backup unit (PBU)
l One slot for the engineering orderwire (EOW)
l Two slots for the system control & communication unit (SCC)
l Four slots for the higher order cross-connect (XCH) board
l One slot for the STI
l One slot for the electromechanical information processing (EPU)
l Two slots for the power interface unit (PIU)
l One slot for the dispersion compensate unit (DCU)
l One slot for the communication (COM) board
l Two slots for the synchronous timing generator (STG)
l Two slots reserved for SIG
Figure 3-6 shows the slot allocation of the rear slot area of the subrack.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
Figure 3-6 Slot allocation of the rear slot area of the subrack
EOW
PBU
SCC
SCC
IU33
55
IU34
XCH
XCH
IU35
IU36
STI
EPU
PIU
51 47 48 33 34 41 42 35 36 58 52 56
SIG
DCU
SIG
COM
IU37
53
IU38
XCH
XCH
IU39
IU40
STG
STG
PIU
49 50 54 37 38 43 44 39 40 45 46 57
Rear slot area
CAUTIONThe rules for naming slots are as follows.l In the case of the front slot area shown inFigure 3-5, the slots are numbered 1 to 32 from the
left to right and from the upper layer to the lower layer.l In the case of the rear slot area shown inFigure 3-6, the slots are numbered 33 to 58. For
example, the slots for cross-connect boards are slots 41–44.
Slot LayoutTable 3-5 lists the details about the slot layout.
Table 3-5 Slot layout
Slot Area Slot SilkScreen
No. Number
Remarks
Front slotarea
IU(01)–IU(32) 1–32 32 House service boards of 20 Gbit/saccess capacity or less.
Rear slotarea
IU(33)–IU(40) 33–40 8 House service boards of 10 Gbit/saccess capacity or less.
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Slot Area Slot SilkScreen
No. Number
Remarks
XCH(41), XCH(42), XCH(43),XCH(44)
41, 42,43, 44
4 Slots 41 and 42 support hot backup.Slots 43 and 44 support hot backup.The cross-connect boards at the upperlayer are independent from the cross-connect boards at the lower layer inactive/standby switching.
STG(45), STG(46)
45, 46 2 Be of mutual hot backup.
SCC(47), SCC(48)
47, 48 2 Be of warm backup.
SIG(49), SIG(50)
49, 50 2 Reserved slots, which can house theJBPA, JBA2, or JDCU.
EOW(51) 51 1 –
EPU(52) 52 1 –
DCU(53) 53 1 –
COM(54) 54 1 –
PBU(55) 55 1 –
PIU(56), PIU(57)
56, 57 2 Be of hot backup.
STI(58) 58 1 –
3.3.3 Boards and Their Valid SlotsThe mapping relationship between the boards and slots is different when different higher ordercross-connect boards are used.
Table 3-6 lists the boards and their valid slots when the EXCH of 720 Gbit/s cross-connectcapacity is used.
Table 3-6 Boards and their valid slots (720 Gbit/s)
Board Valid Slot Board Valid Slot
D64E/D64D IU01–IU32 GXCL IU01–IU32
L64E/JL64 IU01–IU40 EXCL IU01–IU32
F64E/F64D IU01–IU40 JSCC SCC
O16E/O16D IU01–IU32 ESCC SCC
Q16E/JQ16 IU01–IU40 JSTG STG
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
Board Valid Slot Board Valid Slot
D16E/JD16 IU01–IU40 JSTI STI
L16E/JL16 IU01–IU40 JEOW EOW
L16L/L16V IU01–IU40 JCOM COM
JH41 IU01–IU32 JPIU PIU
JLQ4 IU01–IU32 EMPU EPU
JLH1 IU01–IU32 JPBU PBU
JLHE IU18–IU31 JFAN FAN
EGT6 IU01–IU32 JDCU IU01–IU40/DCU/STI/EOW/SIG
GE06 IU01–IU32 JBPA IU01–IU40/DCU/STI/EOW/SIG
EGS8 IU02–IU15, IU18–IU31a
JBA2 IU01–IU40/DCU/STI/EOW/SIG
EAS1 IU02–IU15, IU18–IU31a
EGT6A IU01–IU40
EGTH IU01–IU32 JAFB –
a: In the case of the JSCC board, the total number of EGS8 and EAS1 board is eight. In thecase of the ESCC board, the total number of EGS8 and EAS1 board is 24.
Table 3-7 lists the boards and their valid slots when the GXCH of 400 Gbit/s cross-connectcapacity is used.
Table 3-7 Boards and their valid slots (400 Gbit/s)
Board Valid Slot Board Valid Slot
D64E/D64D IU03–IU14, IU19–IU30 GXCL IU03–IU14, IU19–IU30
L64E/JL64 IU01–IU40 EXCL IU03–IU14, IU19–IU30
F64E/F64D IU01–IU40 JSCC SCC
O16E/O16D IU03–IU14, IU19–IU30 ESCC SCC
Q16E/JQ16 IU01–IU40 JSTG STG
D16E/JD16 IU01–IU40 JSTI STI
L16E/JL16 IU01–IU40 JEOW EOW
L16L/L16V IU01–IU40 JCOM COM
JH41 IU01–IU32 JPIU PIU
JLQ4 IU01–IU32 EMPU EPU
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Board Valid Slot Board Valid Slot
JLH1 IU01–IU32 JPBU PBU
JLHE IU18–IU31 JFAN FAN
EGT6 IU01–IU32 JDCU IU01–IU40/DCU/STI/EOW/SIG
GE06 IU01–IU32 JBPA IU01–IU40/DCU/STI/EOW/SIG
EGS8 IU02–IU15, IU18–IU31a
JBA2 IU01–IU40/DCU/STI/EOW/SIG
EAS1 IU02–IU15, IU18–IU31a
EGT6A IU01–IU40
EGTH IU03–IU14IU19–IU30
JAFB –
a: In the case of the JSCC board, the total number of EGS8 and EAS1 board is eight. In thecase of the ESCC board, the total number of EGS8 and EAS1 board is 24.
3.4 BoardsThis topic describes board types, interfaces and board functional units of the OptiX OSN 9500.
3.4.1 Board TypesThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of boards, mainly the SDH boards, Ethernetservice boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and various auxiliary boards.
3.4.2 SDH Interface UnitThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of SDH interfaces. The interface type determinesthe access capacity.
3.4.3 Ethernet Processing UnitThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides 6xGE and 16xGE transparent transmission boards, 8xGEEthernet Layer 2 switching boards, and 1x10GE Ethernet Layer 2 switching boards.
3.4.4 Cross-Connect UnitThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the higher order and lower order cross-connect boards to flexiblygroom VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 services.
3.4.5 System Control and Communication UnitThe ESCC and JSCC are system control and communication (SCC) boards for the OptiX OSN9500 system. The SCC boards are used to perform communication and management over thesystem. The SCC boards also provide interfaces between the equipment and the NMS. Inaddition, the ESCC and JSCC provide new functions to process the ASON protocols andsignaling. The ASON protocols are the route searching protocols required for dynamic ASONgrooming, such as the generalized mutli-protocol label switching (GMPLS) protocol.
3.4.6 Clock Processing UnitThe clock unit of the OptiX OSN 9500 consists of the JSTG and JSTI to input, output, andprocess the clock signals.
3.4.7 Orderwire Unit
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
The JEOW is responsible for the orderwire function of the OptiX OSN 9500.
3.4.8 System Communication UnitThe JCOM is a system communication unit. The JCOM reports the state information of eachboard to the SCC board. The JCOM also issues the control command from the SCC board toeach board. In addition, the JCOM supports monitoring the performance of the maintenancebuses and protecting the maintenance buses.
3.4.9 Power Interface UnitThe power interface unit uses two JPIU boards to access two channels of DC power supplies,which support mutual backup. The power interface unit also provides electromagneticinterference (EMI) filter and protection for the DC power interfaces. In addition, the powerinterface unit provides stable voltage for the fan tray assemblies and outputs power supplies tothe hub.
3.4.10 Electromechanical Information Processing UnitThe electromechanical information processing unit consists of the EMPU board and the MBUSmodules of boards. This unit is used to monitor the electric and mechanical information of theOptiX OSN 9500 subrack.
3.4.11 Key Power Backup UnitAs a system power backup board, the JPBU provides backup power for boards without board-level backup and for MBUS modules of boards.
3.4.12 Dispersion Compensation UnitIn the case of the OptiX OSN 9500, the JDCU is used to compensate dispersion. Dispersioncompensation is required for long-distance transmission on the line side. When the transmissiondistance of an STM-64 optical interface exceeds 80 km, the dispersion of the optical signalsshould be compensated.
3.4.13 Optical Amplifier UnitAccording to the system requirements, the preamplifier board or booster amplifier board can beconfigured. The optical amplifier unit contains the optical booster amplifier board (JBA2) andoptical preamplifier board (JBPA).
3.4.1 Board TypesThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of boards, mainly the SDH boards, Ethernetservice boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and various auxiliary boards.
Table 3-8 lists boards used for the OptiX OSN 9500. For details, see the OptiX OSN 9500Intelligent Optical Switching System Hardware Description.
Table 3-8 Boards
Unit Board Full Name
SDH interface unit D64E/D64D 2 x STM-64 optical interface board
L64E/JL64 1 x STM-64 optical interface board
F64E /F64D 1 x STM-64 (outband FEC) optical interface board
O16E/O16D 8 x STM-16 optical interface board
Q16E/JQ16 4 x STM-16 optical interface board
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Unit Board Full Name
D16E/JD16 2 x STM-16 optical interface board
L16E/JL16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board
L16L/L16V 1 x STM-16 long-haul optical interface board
JLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board
JH41 16 x STM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
JLH1 16 x STM-1 optical interface board
JLHE 16 x STM-1 electrical interface board
Ethernet processingunit
EGT6/EGT6A
6 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board
GE06 6 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board
EGTH 16 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board
EGS8 8 x GE Ethernet switching board
EAS1 1 x 10GE Ethernet switching board
Cross-connect unit GXCH General higher order cross-connect board
EXCH Enhanced higher order cross-connect board
GXCL General lower order cross-connect board
EXCL Enhanced lower order cross-connect board
SCC unit JSCC General SCC
ESCC Enhanced SCC
Clock processingunit
JSTG Clock processing board
JSTI Clock interface board
Orderwire unit JEOW Orderwire board
Systemcommunication unit
JCOM System communication board
Power interface unit JPIU Power interface unit
Electromechanicalinformationprocessing unit
EMPU Electromechanical information processing board
Key power backupunit
JPBU Key power backup board
Fan control unit JFAN Fan control unit
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
Unit Board Full Name
Dispersioncompensation unit
JDCU Dispersion compensation board
Optical amplifierunit
JBPA Optical preamplifier board
JBA2 Optical booster amplifier board
System backplane JAFB System backplane
Figure 3-7 shows the relations among the boards used for the OptiX OSN 9500.
Figure 3-7 Inter-board relations
JPIU
JEOW
STM-64/STM-16board
STM-64/STM-16board
EX
CH
/GX
CH
EMPU
Systemmanagement
system
JLHE
EGT6/GE06
JSCCJSTG JCOMJSTI
JBPA/JBA2
JDCU
JPBU
STM-64/STM-16board
STM-4/STM-1board
GXCL/EXCL
System orderwire
STM-4 & STM-1
STM-64 & STM-16
External clockinput/output
interface
GE
STM-64 & STM-16
Key powerbackup
Systemenvironmentmonitoring
System workingpower
Systemcommunication
control
Inter-boardcommunicationSystem clock
Workingpower input
External alarminput/output
HUB poweroutput
JPIU
JSTG JSCC
EXCH/GXCH
JSCC Active/standby
STM-1(e)
STM-64 & STM-16
CAUTIONThe JDCU is related only to the line boards connected to it and compensates dispersion for theoptical interfaces connected to it.
3.4.2 SDH Interface UnitThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides multiple types of SDH interfaces. The interface type determinesthe access capacity.
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
The OptiX OSN 9500 provides SDH interfaces such as STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 and STM-1optical interfaces, and STM-1 electrical interfaces. Table 3-9 lists the boards of different ratesand their specifications. In addition, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides the STM-64 colored opticalinterface (100 Gbit/s EA) and STM-16 colored optical interfaces (170 and 640a).
STM-64 synchronous optical interface unitl The D64E/D64D can access 2 x STM-64 optical signals.
l The L64E/JL64 can access 1 x STM-64 optical signals.
l The F64E/F64D can access 1 x STM-64 (outband FEC) optical signals.
STM-16 interface unitl The O16E/O16D can access 8 x STM-16 optical signals.
l The Q16E/JQ16 can access 4 x STM-16 optical signals.
l The D16E/JD16 can access 2 x STM-16 optical signals.
l The L16E/JL16 can access 1 x STM-16 optical signals.
l The L16L/L16V can access 1 x STM-16 long-haul optical signals.
STM-4/STM-1 interface unitl The JH41 can access 16 x STM-4 or 16 x STM-1 optical signals.
l The JLQ4 can access 4 x STM-4 optical signals.
l The JLH1 can access 16 x STM-1 optical signals.
l The JLHE can access 16 x STM-1 electrical signals.
Table 3-9 SDH interface unit
Level Board Interface Type AccessCapacity
STM-64 opticalinterface unit
D64E/D64D
I-64.1, S-64.2b 20 Gbit/s
L64E S-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-64.2b,V-64.2b
10 Gbit/s
JL64 S-64.2b, Le-64.2, L-64.2b, V-64.2b 10 Gbit/s
F64E/F64D
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, 100 Gbit/s EA 10 Gbit/s
STM-16 opticalinterface unit
O16E/O16D
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 20 Gbit/s
Q16E/JQ16
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 10 Gbit/s
D16E/JD16
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 5 Gbit/s
L16E/JL16 I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 2.5 Gbit/s
L16L/L16V
L-16.2(je), V-16.2(je), U-16.2(je),170, 640.a
2.5 Gbit/s
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-15
Level Board Interface Type AccessCapacity
STM-4 opticalinterface unit
JLQ4 L-4.1, S-4.1 2.5 Gbit/s
JH41 S-4.1, L-1.1, S-1.1 Up to 10 Gbit/sSTM-1 opticalinterface unit JLH1 L-1.1, S-1.1 2.5 Gbit/s
STM-1 electricalinterface unit
JLHE SMB 2.5 Gbit/s
Note: Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, L-16.2(je), V-16.2(je), and U-16.2(je) are thecorporate standards of Huawei.
3.4.3 Ethernet Processing UnitThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides 6xGE and 16xGE transparent transmission boards, 8xGEEthernet Layer 2 switching boards, and 1x10GE Ethernet Layer 2 switching boards.
Table 3-10 Ethernet processing unit
Board Interface Type Access Capacity
EGT6 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX 6 Gbit/s
EGT6A 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX
6 Gbit/s
GE06 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX 6 Gbit/s
EGTH 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX, 1000BASE-T
16 Gbit/s
EGS8 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-EX, 1000BASE-ZX
8 Gbit/s
EAS1 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER 10 Gbit/s
3.4.4 Cross-Connect UnitThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the higher order and lower order cross-connect boards to flexiblygroom VC-4, VC-3, and VC-12 services.
The higher cross-connect boards that are available are the GXCH and EXCH, which are usedto perform non-blocking cross-connection of VC-4 higher order granularities. A single GXCHboard supports 200 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity and one OptiX OSN 9500 subrack supports400 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity. A single EXCH board supports 360 Gbit/s cross-connectcapacity and one OptiX OSN 9500 subrack supports 720 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity.
The lower order cross-connect boards that are available are the GXCL and EXCL, which areused to perform VC-3 and VC-12 lower order cross-connection. When the GXCL is used, the
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
maximum lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. When the EXCL is used, two 40 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect protection groups can be configured to provide the cross-connectcapacity of 80 Gbit/s.
Cross-connect boards support board-level 1+1 protection. The active and standby boards are ofhot backup.
Table 3-11 Comparison of cross-connect boards for the OptiX OSN 9500
Cross-ConnectBoard
Cross-ConnectGranularity
Cross-Connect Capacity of a Subrack
GXCH VC-4 2560 x 2560 VC-4 (400 Gbit/s)
EXCH VC-4 4608 x 4608 VC-4 (720 Gbit/s)
GXCL VC-12 or VC-3 8064 x 8064 VC-12 (20 Gbit/s) or 384 x 384 VC-3
EXCL VC-12 or VC-3 32256 x 32256 VC-12 (80 Gbit/s) or 1536 x 1536VC-3
3.4.5 System Control and Communication UnitThe ESCC and JSCC are system control and communication (SCC) boards for the OptiX OSN9500 system. The SCC boards are used to perform communication and management over thesystem. The SCC boards also provide interfaces between the equipment and the NMS. Inaddition, the ESCC and JSCC provide new functions to process the ASON protocols andsignaling. The ASON protocols are the route searching protocols required for dynamic ASONgrooming, such as the generalized mutli-protocol label switching (GMPLS) protocol.
NOTE
It is recommended that you configure a maximum of 640 ASON services on the JSCC system board.Otherwise, the ASON rerouting time may be too long. This restriction, however, does not apply to theESCC board.
The system control function mainly indicates the synchronous equipment management function(SEMF). The SEMF is used to collect status information such as alarms and performance eventsof boards of the system and to perform management accordingly.
The system communication function mainly indicates the message communication function(MCF). The MCF is used for communication between the SCC and each board, and betweenthe SCC and the NMS. The equipment then can use the DCC channels to exchange the OAMinformation with other NEs. The SEMF and MCF functions help the NMS perform uniformmanagement over the equipment and other NEs on the entire network.
3.4.6 Clock Processing UnitThe clock unit of the OptiX OSN 9500 consists of the JSTG and JSTI to input, output, andprocess the clock signals.
The JSTG provides the system clock for the OptiX OSN 9500 system. When the clock unit worksin tracing mode, any of the line or external clock sources can be used as the reference clocksource. The selection of clocks of different priorities and usage of the S1 byte ensure the
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-17
reliability of the network timing system. The clock unit can also work in the holdover or free-run mode. The JSTG also outputs the external synchronous clock.
The JSTI is a clock interface board and provides input and output interfaces for two channels ofexternal clocks.
3.4.7 Orderwire UnitThe JEOW is responsible for the orderwire function of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The JEOW processes the phone orderwire and serial port orderwire for the system. The JEOWalso provides various maintenance interfaces for the system, such as the RS-232 and voiceinterfaces.
3.4.8 System Communication UnitThe JCOM is a system communication unit. The JCOM reports the state information of eachboard to the SCC board. The JCOM also issues the control command from the SCC board toeach board. In addition, the JCOM supports monitoring the performance of the maintenancebuses and protecting the maintenance buses.
3.4.9 Power Interface UnitThe power interface unit uses two JPIU boards to access two channels of DC power supplies,which support mutual backup. The power interface unit also provides electromagneticinterference (EMI) filter and protection for the DC power interfaces. In addition, the powerinterface unit provides stable voltage for the fan tray assemblies and outputs power supplies tothe hub.
3.4.10 Electromechanical Information Processing UnitThe electromechanical information processing unit consists of the EMPU board and the MBUSmodules of boards. This unit is used to monitor the electric and mechanical information of theOptiX OSN 9500 subrack.
This unit has the following functions.
l Monitors two stand-alone voltages of the JPIU.
l Monitors temperature and voltages of boards.
l Detects and controls the rotating speed of intelligent fans.
l Controls the cabinet indicators.
l Provides the audible and visual alarm function.
l Inputs, outputs, and concatenates alarms.
3.4.11 Key Power Backup UnitAs a system power backup board, the JPBU provides backup power for boards without board-level backup and for MBUS modules of boards.
The interface boards, JCOM, JEOW, and optical booster amplifier boards are provided withpower separately. The power supplies for these boards are of centralized cold backup. If thepower supply for any of these boards fails, the JPBU supplies power for this board to ensure
3 Hardware ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
3-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
services are not affected. The JPBU can also provide protection against power failure for oneboard.
3.4.12 Dispersion Compensation UnitIn the case of the OptiX OSN 9500, the JDCU is used to compensate dispersion. Dispersioncompensation is required for long-distance transmission on the line side. When the transmissiondistance of an STM-64 optical interface exceeds 80 km, the dispersion of the optical signalsshould be compensated.
3.4.13 Optical Amplifier UnitAccording to the system requirements, the preamplifier board or booster amplifier board can beconfigured. The optical amplifier unit contains the optical booster amplifier board (JBA2) andoptical preamplifier board (JBPA).
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-19
4 Software Architecture
About This Chapter
4.1 OverviewThe software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and workswith other modules.
4.2 Communication ProtocolsThe communication interfaces of the system are mainly Qx interfaces. Complete protocol stackand messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812.
4.3 Board SoftwareThe board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation ofthe board.
4.4 NE SoftwareThe NE software manages, monitors and controls the boards operations in the NE. In addition,the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards,so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.
4.5 Network Management SystemThe network management system, that is, the OptiX iManager, manages the system in acentralized manner.
4.6 ASON SoftwareAccording to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 4 Software Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
4.1 OverviewThe software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and workswith other modules.
The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software andNM system.
The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer. Hierarchicalstructure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer performs specific functionsand provides service for the upper layer.
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 4-1.
In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System" and "BoardSoftware".
Figure 4-1 Software architecture
High LevelCommunication Module
Communication Module
Equipment ManagementModule
Real-timemulti-taskoperatingsystem
NE software
Network ManagementSystem
Board Software
DatabaseManagement
Module
Network side Module
4.2 Communication ProtocolsThe communication interfaces of the system are mainly Qx interfaces. Complete protocol stackand messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812.
Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and NE (NE)equipment through local communication network (LCN).
At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS) areprovided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is developed on thebasis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack.
4 Software ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial line internetprotocol (SLIP).
4.3 Board SoftwareThe board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the operation ofthe board.
It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to the NEsoftware through performance events and alarm.
The specific functions include:
l Alarm management
l Performance management
l Configuration management
l Communication management
The drive control over functional circuits is board software-specific. The board software realizesunder the control of the NE software the ITU-T compliant functions.
4.4 NE SoftwareThe NE software manages, monitors and controls the boards operations in the NE. In addition,the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the T2000 and the boards,so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.
According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom managementnetwork, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF) and OS function atnetwork unit layer.
The data communication function (DCF) realizes the communication between the NE and othercomponents (including the coordinating equipment, the network management system, and theother NEs).
l Real-time multi-task operating systemThe real-time multitasking function of the NE software realizes the management of publicresources to support the application of executable programs.It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an application programexecution environment, which is independent of the processor hardware.
l Communication moduleThe communication module is the interface module between NE software and boardsoftware.It realizes the communication between the NE software and board software in compliancewith the corresponding communication protocol, which serves a purpose of informationexchange and equipment maintenance.Through the communication module, boards maintenance and operation commands fromthe NE software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and performanceevents of the boards are reported to the NE software.
l Network Side (NS) Module
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 4 Software Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment managementmodule. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer)and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer.
Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
– Qx interface module
– Command line interface module
– Security management module
l Equipment management module
The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE management.It includes administrator and agent.
Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events.
Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator, implementthe operations of the managed object, and send up events according to the change of statusof the managed object.
l High-level communication module
The high-level communication module provides the message communication function(MCF) between the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. The moduletransmits the OAM&P messages through the hardware interface of the SCC board to realizethe information exchange between the network management system and NE and theinformation exchange between NEs. The communication module consists of the networkcommunication module, the serial communication module, and the ECC communicationmodule.
l Database management module
The database management module is a critical part of the NE software.
It includes two independent parts: data and program.
The data are organized in the form of database, including network database, alarm database,performance database and equipment database.
The program manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.5 Network Management SystemThe network management system, that is, the OptiX iManager, manages the system in acentralized manner.
The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission network, andmaintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipments in the network.
In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates standardmanagement information model as well as object-oriented management technology.
It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to monitorand manage the network equipments.
The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipments and the transmissionnetwork to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission equipments.
The management functions of the NM software include:
4 Software ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
l Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks, clears, andcounts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis and fault diagnosis.
l Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and printsperformance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and resetsperformance register.
l Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services, trails,subnets and time.
l Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management, NE loginmanagement, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft terminal (LCT) accesscontrol of the equipments.
l Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser shutdown(ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to help themaintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
4.6 ASON SoftwareAccording to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. Thetransport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASONsoftware is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol), OSPF-TE (open shortestpath first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation protocol-traffic engineering)protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes thelink management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connectionmanagement module.
Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture
Cross-connectionmanagement
module
NEsoftware
Signaling module
Routing module
T2000
AOSN software
LMP link managementmodule
Link Management Module
By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 4 Software Architecture
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
l Create and maintain control channels.
l Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling ModuleBy using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:
l Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.
l Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing ModuleBy using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l Collect and flood the TE link information.
l Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.
l Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management ModuleThe cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l Create and delete cross-connections.
l Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.
4 Software ArchitectureOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
5 Ethernet Features
About This Chapter
This chapter describes Ethernet boards and typical Ethernet service scenarios of the OptiX OSN9500.
5.1 FunctionsThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides Ethernet boards including EGT6, EGT6A, GE06, EGTH, EGS8and EAS1, which can meet different requirements of Ethernet services.
5.2 ApplicationThis topic describes typical Ethernet service application scenarios of the OptiX OSN 9500.
5.3 ProtectionThis topic describes various Ethernet service protection schemes of the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 5 Ethernet Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
5.1 FunctionsThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides Ethernet boards including EGT6, EGT6A, GE06, EGTH, EGS8and EAS1, which can meet different requirements of Ethernet services.
For information on the functions and features of these boards, see Table 5-1, Table 5-2, Table5-3, Table 5-4, Table 5-5, and Table 5-6.
Table 5-1 Functions and features of the EGT6
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function l Transmits and receives 6xGE Ethernet optical signals.
l Realizes the O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing,mapping, overhead pointer processing for signals.
l Connects to the working and protection cross-connect boardsthrough the backplane to exchange data to groom services.
Concatenation service Supports virtual concatenation and cross-connect services at theVC-4/VC-3 level.
Interface type 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-SX.
Service type Supports the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission fromGE services to GE services between different equipment.
Encapsulation format Supports the HDLC, LAPS (X.85, X.86), and GFP-F protocols.
Optical interface type LC.
Optical module of theboard
Supports the hot-swappable function.
Flow control function Complies with the IEEE 802.3X standard.
Transmission distance Varies with the type of the optical module. Generally, thetransmission distance is 550 m and 10 km.
Loopback function Supports inloop at the MAC layer, and inloop at the PHY layer.
LCAS function Supported.
5 Ethernet FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 5-2 Functions and features of the EGT6A
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function l Transmits and receives 6xGE Ethernet optical signals.
l Realizes the O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing,mapping, overhead pointer processing for signals.
l Connects to the working and protection cross-connect boardsthrough the backplane to exchange data to groom services.
Concatenation service Supports virtual concatenation and cross-connect services at theVC-4/VC-3 level.
Interface type 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-ZX.
Service type Supports the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission fromGE services to GE services between different equipment.
Encapsulation format Supports the HDLC, LAPS (X.85, X.86), and GFP-F protocols.
Optical interface type LC.
Optical module of theboard
Supports the hot-swappable function.
Flow control function Complies with the IEEE 802.3X standard.
Transmission distance Varies with the type of the optical module. Generally, thetransmission distance is 550 m,10 km, or 40 km.
Loopback function Supports inloop at the MAC layer, and inloop at the PHY layer.
LCAS function Supported.
JUMBO frame Supports the JUMBO frame of up to 9600 bytes.
ETH-OAM Complies with IEEE 802.1ag.
Link state pass through(LPT)
Supported. In addition, the hold-off time can be set and queried.
NOTE
The EGT6A boards can function as spare boards to replace the EGT6 and GE06 boards. The EGT6 andGE06 boards cannot, however, be used as the spare boards to replace the EGT6A boards.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 5 Ethernet Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
Table 5-3 Functions and features of the GE06
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function l Transmits and receives 6xGE Ethernet optical signals.
l Realizes the O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing,mapping, overhead pointer processing for signals.
l Connects to the working and protection cross-connect boardsthrough the backplane to exchange data to groom services.
Concatenation service Supports virtual concatenation services at the VC-4 level.
Interface type 1000BASE-LX and 1000BASE-SX.
Service type Supports the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission fromGE services to GE services between different equipment.
Encapsulation format Supports HDLC, LAPS (X.85, X.86), and GFP-F protocols.
Optical interface type LC.
Optical module of theboard
Supports the hot-swappable function.
Flow control function Complies with the IEEE 802.3X standard.
Transmission distance Varies with the type of the optical module. Generally, thetransmission distance is 550 m or 10 km.
Loopback function Supports inloop at the MAC layer, and inloop at the PHY layer.
LCAS function Not supported.
NOTE
The EGT6 and EGT6A can replace the GE06, but the GE06 cannot replace the EGT6 and EGT6A.
Table 5-4 Functions and features of the EGTH
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function l Transmits and receives 16xGE Ethernet optical signals or 16xGEelectrical signals.
l Realizes the O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing,mapping, overhead pointer processing for signals.
l Connects to the working and protection cross-connect boardsthrough the backplane to exchange data to groom services.
Concatenation service Supports virtual concatenation and cross-connect services at theVC-4/VC-3 level.
5 Ethernet FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Function andFeature
Description
Interface type 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-T and 1000BASE-ZX.
Service type Supports the point-to-point Ethernet transparent transmission fromGE services to GE services between different equipment.
Encapsulation format Supports HDLC, LAPS (X.85, X.86), and GFP-F protocols.
Optical interface type LC.
Optical module of theboard
Supports the hot-swappable function.
Flow control function Complies with the IEEE 802.3X standard.
Transmission distance Varies with the type of the optical module. Generally, thetransmission distance is 550 m, 10 km, or 40 km.
Loopback function Supports inloop at the MAC layer, and inloop at the PHY layer.
LCAS function Supported.
JUMBO frame Supports the JUMBO frame of up to 9600 bytes. The GE interfacedoes not transmit the JUMBO frame when the flow control functionis supported. The GE interface does not perform the flow controlfunction when it transmits the JUMBO frame.
DLAG Supported. The DLAG and ASON services can coexist.
ETH-OAM Complies with IEEE 802.1ag.
LPT Supported. In addition, the hold-off time can be set and queried.
Table 5-5 Functions and features of the EGS8
Function and Feature Description
Basic function l Transmits and receives 8xGE Ethernet optical signals.
l Realizes the O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing,mapping, Layer 2 switching, and overhead pointerprocessing for signals.
l Connects to the working and protection cross-connectboards through the backplane to exchange data to groomservices.
Concatenation service Supports virtual concatenation and cross-connect services atthe VC-4/VC-3 level, and adjacent concatenation at the VC-4level.
Interface type 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-EX and1000BASE-ZX
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 5 Ethernet Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
Function and Feature Description
Service type Supports the EPL, EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN services.
Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F protocol.
Optical interface type LC.
Optical module of the board Supports the hot-swappable function.
Flow control function Complies with the IEEE 802.3X standard.
Transmission distance Varies with the type of the optical module. Generally, thetransmission distance is 550 m, 10 km, 40 km, or 80 km.
Loopback function Supports inloop at the MAC and PHY layers.
LCAS function Supported.
Number of virtualconcatenation groups(VCG)
Supports 16 VCGs.
Spanning tree Supports STP and RSTP.
QinQ Supported.
QoS Supports CAR, shaping (flow shaping), and CoS scheduling ofeight priorities.
ETH-OAM Complies with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah.
LPT function Supports P2PLPT and P2MP LPT.
Link aggregation group(LAG)
Supports the inter-board LAG and intra-board LAG.
IGMP Snooping Supported.
Table 5-6 Functions and features of the EAS1
Function andFeature
Description
Basic function l Transmits and receives 1x10GE Ethernet optical signals.
l Realizes the O/E conversion, Ethernet frame processing,mapping, Layer 2 switching, and overhead pointer processing forsignals.
l Connects to the working and protection cross-connect boardsthrough the backplane to exchange data to groom services.
Concatenation service Supports virtual concatenation at the VC-4/VC-3 level, and adjacentconcatenation at VC-4 level.
Interface type 10GBASE-LR and 10GBASE-ER.
5 Ethernet FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Function andFeature
Description
Service type Supports the EPL, EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN services.
Encapsulation format Supports the GFP-F protocol.
Optical interface type LC.
Optical module of theboard
Supports the hot-swappable function.
Flow control function Complies with the IEEE 802.3X standard.
Transmission distance Varies with the type of the optical module. Generally, thetransmission distance is 40 km or 10 km.
Loopback function Supports inloop at the MAC and PHY layers.
LCAS function Supported.
Number of VCGs Supports 24 VCGs.
Spanning tree Supports STP and RSTP.
QinQ Supported.
QoS Supports CAR, shaping (flow shaping), and CoS scheduling of eightpriorities.
ETH-OAM Comples with IEEE 802.1ag.
LPT function Supports P2PLPT and P2MP LPT.
Port mirroringfunction
Supported.
LAG Supports the inter-board LAG and intra-board LAG.
IGMP snooping Supported.
5.2 ApplicationThis topic describes typical Ethernet service application scenarios of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 can access the Ethernet services on the SDH transmission platform. TheEthernet services supported are as follows:
l EPL service
l EVPL service
l EPLAN service
l EVPLAN service
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 5 Ethernet Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
EPL ServiceThe EPL transmits the point-to-point Ethernet services transparently. As shown in Figure 5-1,the Ethernet services at different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through theirrespective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring(SHR). In this manner, the secure and reliable transmission is guaranteed.
Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
SHR
1
3
4
5
Traffic flown
NE 4
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
2
Optix NE
EVPL ServiceThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports the EVPL services in two modes.
l EVPL service in shared port mode. In this mode, the EVPL services are isolated by VLANsto realize bandwidth sharing.
As shown in Figure 5-2, the traffic is classified for the Ethernet services according to the VLANID, to distinguish different departments of Company A. In addition, the two services aretransmitted over their respective independent VCTRUNKs.
5 Ethernet FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 5-2 EVPL service of shared ports
Headqwarters ofCompany A
NE 1 NE 2
Marketing Dept. ofCompany A
TechnicalSupport Dept. of
Company A
OptiX NE Enterprise user
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
l EVPL service in shared VCTRUNK mode. The OptiX OSN 9500 supports two methodsto converge or distribute the EVPL service.– Based on the VLAN tags, as shown in Figure 5-3– Based on the QinQ technology, as shown in Figure 5-4
Figure 5-3 EVPL services isolated by VLAN tags
VCTRUNK
AA'
NE 1 NE 2
B
Community Cyber cafe OptiX NE
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN100
VLAN200
1 PORT2 1PORT PORTPORT2
B'
Figure 5-4 EVPL services isolated by QinQ technology
Branch 1
NE 1 NE 2
Company A OptiX NE
Branch 2
Marketing Dept.
TechnicalSupport Dept.
MarketingDept.
TechnicalSupport Dept.
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2
`
C-AwareAdd tags
S-AwareStrip tag
S-Aware C-Aware
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 5 Ethernet Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
EPLAN ServiceThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as theEPLAN service, which can be transmitted according to its destination media access control(MAC) address.
As shown in Figure 5-5, respective LANs of Companies A and B are connected to four NEs.The Ethernet services among the four NEs are not of a fixed point-to-point type. For example,if a user of Company A connected to NE3 needs to communicate with the users of Company Aconnected to the other three NEs, the service flow directions are not fixed. The Ethernet Layer2 switching function provided by the OptiX OSN 9500 can be implemented to solve this problem.For example, after performing relevant settings on NE3, the system sets up a MAC address tablethat can be periodically updated by self-learning. Then, the data of Companies A and B on NE3can be transmitted to the destinations over either the same VCTRUNK or different VCTRUNKs,according to their MAC address tables.
In this way, the system configuration is simplified, and the bandwidth utilization is improved.In addition, the operator can easily maintain or manage the equipment.
Figure 5-5 EPLAN service
NE1
MAC Address VC-TrunkMAC 1 NE1 ①MAC 2 NE4 ②MAC 3 NE2 ③
… … …
NE2
NE3
NE41
23
nTraffic flow
Company A
Company A
Company A
Company A
Company B
Company B
Company B
Company B
SHR
Optix NE
EVPLAN ServiceThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the EVPLAN service of the QinQ model.
The EVPLAN service implements the multipoint-to-multipoint connection of user sites. Fromthe viewpoint of users, the EVPLAN network is a big VLAN where the user services can beconverged.
5 Ethernet FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
As shown in Figure 5-6, after the data frames are transmitted to the equipment over the C-Awareport, the relevant S-VLAN can be queried from the QinQ service table entries based on the C-VLAN. Then, the Layer 2 MAC address table can be queried to obtain the relevant egress portaccording to the destination address and the S-VLAN. When the data frames are transmittedfrom the C-Aware port, the Layer 2 MAC address table can be queried according to the S-VLANand the destination address. Then, the data frames are forwarded to the relevant egress port andthe S-VLAN is peeled off. In Figure 5-6, S-A and S-B are the VLAN domains of the serviceprovider, and C-A and C-B are the VLAN domains of the users.
Figure 5-6 EVPLAN service
Add-A-1
S-VLAN PORTS-A 1
1…… …………
MAC
Add-A-1
Add-B-1 S-B
1 S-Aware 2 S-Aware
1 S-Aware
2 S-Aware
1 S-Aware 2 S-Aware
1 S-Aware
2 S-AwareAdd-B-
1Add-B-
3
Add-A-3I C-Aware
II C-Aware
Add-A-2
Add-B-2
I C-AwareII C-Aware
I C-Aware
II C-Aware
I C-AwareII C-Aware
Add-B-4
Add-A-4 C-VLAN PORT
C-A III
…… …………
C-B
S-VLANS-A
S-BMAC address table
Company A
Company ACompany A
Company A
Company B
Company B
Company B
Company B
QinQ service
Optix NE
5.3 ProtectionThis topic describes various Ethernet service protection schemes of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN equipment provides the following protection schemes for the Ethernet services.
l Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
l Spanning tree protocol (STP)/Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)
l Link aggreation group (LAG)
l Distributed Link Aggregation Group (DLAG)
l Link state pass through (LPT)
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 5 Ethernet Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
LCASThe LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the concatenationfunction. The LCAS has the following functions:
l When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS enables theconfiguration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VCquantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged duringthe dynamic change).
l The LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete a member to increase ordecrease the bandwidth. A service is not interrupted when you adjust the bandwidth.
Figure 5-7 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS
I want another 10 Mbandwidth.
BranchHeadquarters
Headquarters
New member
Member
MemberBranch
Member
Member
MSTP network
Optix NE
As shown in Figure 5-8 , the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service. When amember fails, the failed member is automatically deleted, while other members keep transmittingdata normally. As a result, you can prevent the entire concatenation group from beingunavailable. When the failed member is available again, it is automatically restored, and the datais loaded to the member again.
5 Ethernet FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 5-8 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS
Member
Member Headquarters
BranchFailed member
Member
Member Headquarters
Branch Delete failedmember
MSTP network
Optix NE
STP/RSTPThe Ethernet boards support the STP and RSTP. When the STP or RSTP is started, it logicallymodifies the network topology to avoid a broadcast storm. Moreover, the STP or RSTP canprotect a link by restructuring the topology.
LAGAn LAG bundles multiple links that are connected to the same equipment, to increase thebandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as a link. The LAG providesthe following functions:
l Improving the link availability. In an LAG, the members dynamically back up each other.When a link is interrupted, other members quickly take it over.
l Increasing the link bandwidth. The LAG provides a method of economically increasing thetransmission rate for the users. When multiple physical links are bundled, the user canobtain a data link of higher bandwidth, without upgrading the existing equipment. Thecapacity of an LAG equals the sum of the capacity of all member links.
l Providing load balancing. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and backup each other.
l Improving the reliability. The members in an LAG dynamically back up each other.
The EGS8 and EAS1 boards support link aggregation. Currently, they support only manualaggregation and static aggregation.
DLAGThe DLAG requires the use of two boards. One board is the working board and the other is theprotection board.
During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not. The equipmentconfigured with the DLAG should be in connection with the equipment where the LACP is
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 5 Ethernet Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
running. When any intermediate node is between two equipment sets where the DLAG isconfigured, the intermediated node should support the transparent transmission of the protocolpackets.
The DLAG can be of the revertive mode or the non-revertive mode.
l Revertive mode. If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to theprotection board. When the working board recovers, the DLAG is automatically switchedto the working board.
l Non-revertive mode. If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to theprotection board. When the working board recovers, the DLAG is not automaticallyswitched to the working board unless the protection board becomes faulty.
The EGS8, EAS1, and EGTH boards support distributed link aggregation.
LPTThe LPT function is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the working andprotection ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available forprotection. When the working link is faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local port. In thiscase, the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, the service isswitched from the working port to the protection port and is thus protected.
The LPT function includes P2P LPT and P2MP LPT.
5 Ethernet FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
6 DCN Features
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the DCN features of the OptiX OSN 9500.
6.1 DCN OverviewThis topic describes the concept, background and distribution mode of the DCN.
6.2 HWECCThis topic describes the feature and the application of HWECC.
6.3 IP over DCCThis topic describes the feature and the application of IP over DCC.
6.4 OSI over DCCThis topic describes the feature and the application of OSI over DCC.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6.1 DCN OverviewThis topic describes the concept, background and distribution mode of the DCN.
The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a datacommunication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs.
In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are both regarded as network nodes, which can be connected throughEthernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs).
In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building, indifferent buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection between the EMS andNEs usually requires an external DCN that is composed of equipment such as LAN switch androuters. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. This topicdescribes the internal DCN composed of NEs. See Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 DCN network
IP/OSIDCN
External DCN
T2000
HW ECC orIP/OSI over
DCC
Internal DCN
OptiX optical transmission equipment
LAN switch
6.1.1 Background of DCNWith the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult.A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost.
6.1.2 DCN SolutionThe OptiX equipment series of Huawei provide multiple DCN solutions.
6.1.3 Equipment DCC AllocationThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports multiple modes to allocate the DCC resources.
6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
6.1.1 Background of DCNWith the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult.A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost.
In a DCN, the DCC bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management.The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so that the network constructioncost is greatly lowered. For a DCN, the SDH provides the following bandwidth.
l By using the D1–D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the SDHprovides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
l By using the D4–D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the SDHprovides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
l By using the D1–D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768 kbit/sbandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 6-2 shows the position of the DCC bytes in the SDH overhead.
Figure 6-2 Position of DCC bytes in the SDH overhead
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
AU PTR
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
* *
RSOH
MSOH
6.1.2 DCN SolutionThe OptiX equipment series of Huawei provide multiple DCN solutions.
The OptiX equipment supports the DCN networking by using the following three protocols:
l HWECC
l TCP/IP (IP over DCC)
l OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networkingof OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. As itis private, the HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybridnetworking with equipment from other vendors.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the managementissue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. These two protocolscan also be used in a network that is composed of only Huawei equipment.
NOTE
When OptiX equipment is interconnected with the equipment of the other vendors, which does not supportthe TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent transmissionfunction for DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAMinformation.
6.1.3 Equipment DCC AllocationThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports multiple modes to allocate the DCC resources.
Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 9500
DCC Allocation JSCC Board ESCC Board
Channel type Support both the D1–D3,D4–D12, and D1–D12channels.
Support both the D1–D3,D4–D12, and D1–D12channels.
Operationmode
Mode 1 Support288 D1–D3channels.
Support 288 D1–D3channels.
Mode 2 Support 288 D4–D12channels.
Support 288 D4–D12channels.
Mode 3 (Default) Support 252 D1–D3channels.Support 252 D4–D12channels.
Support 288 D1–D3channels.Support 288 D4–D12channels.
Mode 4 Support 252 D1–D12channels.
Support 288 D1–D12channels.
Mode 5 Support 164 D1–D3channels.Support 164 D4–D12channels.Support 84 D1–D12channels.
Support 184 D1–D3channels.Support 184 D4–D12channels.Support 92 D1–D12channels.
Mode 6 Support 200 D1–D3channels.Support 200 D4–D12channels.Support 50 D1–D12channels.
Support 224 D1–D3channels.Support 224 D4–D12channels.Support 56 D1–D12channels.
Default protocol type D1–D3 D4–D12 D1–D3 D4–D12
HWECC IP address HWECC IP address
6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
6.2 HWECCThis topic describes the feature and the application of HWECC.
6.2.1 Functions and FeaturesThe HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment.In hybrid networking with equipment of other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not able toidentify the OAM information from equipment of other vendors, but can transparently transmitsuch OAM information. By using the existing DCC resources, the user can manage theequipment in a centralized manner.
6.2.2 ApplicationThe HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
6.2.1 Functions and FeaturesThe HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment.In hybrid networking with equipment of other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not able toidentify the OAM information from equipment of other vendors, but can transparently transmitsuch OAM information. By using the existing DCC resources, the user can manage theequipment in a centralized manner.
The HWECC protocol has the following features:
l Provide a flexible networking environment.
l NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for ECCcommunication.
l Transparently transmit the OAM information from equipment of other vendors.
NOTE
When the JH41 board is inserted in the 10 Gbit/s slot of the OptiX OSN 9500, up to eight ECCs are supportedby the first eight optical interfaces. When the O16E/O16D board is inserted in the 20 Gbit/s slot, up to eightECCs are supported.
6.2.2 ApplicationThe HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transmitted by the OptiX OSN Equipment Only
When the OAM information is transmitted only among OptiX OSN equipment, a gateway NEis needed to communicate with the T2000. Connected to the gateway NE through the Qxinterface, the T2000 tests, manages and maintains the entire network.
The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality, lower the maintenance cost, andensure a reasonable use of network resources. A non-gateway NE is connected to the gatewayNE through ECC to transmit the OAM information.
In some special cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is alsoavailable among NEs. See Figure 6-3.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC
Network cable
Fiber
HUB1PC
HUB2NE6GNE1
NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5
NE6 NE7
NE8
NE9 NE10
NE12
NE11
Subnet1 Subnet2
Optix NE
Transparent Transmission of OAM Information from the Third-Party EquipmentWhen the OptiX OSN equipment is provided between third party equipment, the OAMinformation of the third party equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4–D12 bytesof the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted from the third party equipment (ECC)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
D1-D3 D1-D3Transparenttransmission
D4-D12
Optix NE
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by the Third-Party EquipmentWhen the third party equipment is provided between the OptiX OSN equipment, the OAMinformation of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4–D12bytes of the equipment. See Figure 6-5.
6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third party equipment (ECC)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
D1-D3 D1-D3
Transparent
transmission
D4-D12
Optix NE
6.3 IP over DCCThis topic describes the feature and the application of IP over DCC.
6.3.1 FeaturesWith the IP over DCC solution, the OptiX OSN 9500 can transmit the network managementinformation.
6.3.2 ApplicationThe IP over DCC solution has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.3.1 FeaturesWith the IP over DCC solution, the OptiX OSN 9500 can transmit the network managementinformation.
The IP over DCC solution has the following features.
l The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment of other vendors. In thiscase, the network management is simplified.
l The Layer 3 functions of the protocol stack are adopted. In this case, additional overheadsor server trails are not required to transmit the OAM information from equipment of othervendors.
l The networking modes are flexible.
l Several application layer protocols are supported.
6.3.2 ApplicationThe IP over DCC solution has two typical applications depending on the networking.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by the Third Party EquipmentWhen the third party equipment is provided between the OptiX OSN equipment, the OAMinformation of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third partyequipment, by using the IP over DCC solution. See Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third party equipment (IP)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
IP over DCC
Optix NE
Transparent Transmission of OAM Information from the Third Party EquipmentWhen the OptiX OSN 9500 is provided between the third party equipment, the OAM informationcan be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment, by using the IP over DCCsolution. See Figure 6-7.
6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 6-7 Transparent transmission of OAM information from the third party equipment (IP)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
IP over DCC
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
Optix NE
6.4 OSI over DCCThis topic describes the feature and the application of OSI over DCC.
6.4.1 FeaturesThe OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN equipment andother optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.
6.4.2 ApplicationThe OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.4.1 FeaturesThe OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN equipment andother optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.
The IP over DCC solution has the following features:
l In a transmission network based on the equipment of different vendors, the OSI over DCCprotocol can be used to transparently transmit the OAM information at the network layer.Therefore, the OSI over DCC provides a more flexible networking.
l The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC resourcesmanage the equipment of different vendors in a centralized manner.
6.4.2 ApplicationThe OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-9
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by the Third-Party EquipmentWhen the third party equipment is provided between the OptiX OSN equipment, the OAMinformation of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by the third partyequipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-8, the Huawei equipment is at the network edge, and the equipment ofother vendors is in the backbone network. The OAM information between the T2000 and theOptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded by the equipment of other vendors. In this case,each subnet composed of Huawei equipment must have at least one gateway NE.
Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third party equipment (OSI)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
IP over DCC
Optix NE
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by the OptiX OSN EquipmentWhen the OptiX OSN equipment is provided between the third party equipment, the OAMinformation can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by using the OSIover DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is in the backbone network, and the equipmentof other vendors is at the network edge. The OAM information between the network managementsystem and the equipment of other vendors needs to be forwarded by Huawei equipment.
NOTE
In practice, a network cannot always be divided clearly. A more common hybrid networking is that theequipment of different vendors coexists at both the core layer and the peripheral layer.
6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 6-9 Transparent transmission of OAM information from the third party equipment (OSI)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
OSI over DCC
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
OSI protocolstack
OSI protocol stack
OSIprotocol
stack
Optix NE
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-11
7 ASON Features
About This Chapter
This chapter describes various ASON features and ASON services of the OptiX OSN 9500.
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the TopologiesThe automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control linksand TE links.
7.2 End-to-End Service ConfigurationThe ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and RestorationThe ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and networksecurity.
7.4 ASON Clock TracingASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode.In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. Inthis way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
7.5 SLAThe ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
7.6 Diamond ServicesDiamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in thenetwork, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicableto voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
7.7 Gold ServicesGold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamondservices, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
7.8 Silver ServicesSilver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver levelservice is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
7.9 Copper ServicesThe copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt servicesin holidays, are configured as copper services.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
7.10 Iron ServicesThe iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as ironservices. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can beconfigured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
7.11 TunnelsTunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASONserver trails.
7.12 Service AssociationThe service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different pointsinto the ASON network.
7.13 Service OptimizationAfter the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thusrequires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching theoptimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize theservice without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during theservice optimization.
7.14 Service MigrationOptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services andtraditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interruptthe services.
7.15 Reverting Services to Original RoutesAfter many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.You can revert all service to the original routes.
7.16 Preset Restoring TrailCustomers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. Tothis end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This functionhelps increase the controllability of service routing.
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration TrailFor a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, thesilver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a sharedmesh restoration trail.
7.18 Shared Risk Link GroupIn the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.
7.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCASThe ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the TopologiesThe automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control linksand TE links.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control LinksThe ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE LinksThe ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control LinksThe ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPFprotocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control linksto the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the controllinks in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide controltopology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortestroute to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is usedfor the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.
Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discoverthe network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the managementsystem for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
Figure 7-2 Management of control topology
R1
R2
R3
R4
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE LinksThe ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TElink verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire networkthrough OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wideresource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion andaddition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to T2000,which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayedon the NM in real time.
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
7.2 End-to-End Service ConfigurationThe ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. Toconfigure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidthrequirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodesare all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node,explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing andsignaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I inFigure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connectionat nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculatesthe best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
l Choose the bandwidth granularity.
l Choose the server level.
l Choose the source node.
l Choose the sink node.
l Create the service.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-5
Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and RestorationThe ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and networksecurity.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Comparedwith the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50%bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidthdemand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for eachservices so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security.
As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculatesanother route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 7-5 Trail restoration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
7.4 ASON Clock TracingASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode.In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. Inthis way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source. The clockis then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is avoided. In addition,the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with many ASON NEs, severalASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20 ASON NEs are on the clock tracing linkin a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet generates its own clock tracing relation to trace theprimary source in the local subnet. In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary sourceand link does not affect the clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, oneASON clock subnet is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing
The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
l Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be createdto realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
l Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the auto-tracingand auto-switching features.
l The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
Clock Protection Protocol
To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must start thestandard SSM protocol.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-7
Primary Reference Clock SourceWithin the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock tracing relation.At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or internal clock source of edgeNEs should be manually set as the primary reference clock source for the ASON clock subnet.The following clock sources can be set as the primary clock reference source.l Line clock source
l External clock source
l Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The ASONclock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock sources. The other clocksources back up the traced clock source. When the selected primary reference clock source fails,the entire subnet automatically traces another backup primary reference clock source. In thisway, a new clock tracing tree is established. A priority should be set for the primary referenceclock source.
As shown in Figure 7-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock sources areconfigured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON clock subnetautomatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces theprimary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. When the primary BITS fails, eachASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet tracesthe secondary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet
Primary baseclock source Standby base
clock sourceA
BITS BITS
B
:ASON NE
: BITS
Interfacing ModeBy default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according to thenetwork topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an available clocksource. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical interfaces to the clock quality notdetected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this way, these optical interfaces are excludedfrom the options of the clock tracing sources for ASON NEs.
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is configured withsuch a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and the quality of the out-linkclock is increased. During the computation for creating the clock tracing tree, the clock signalsstrengthened by the regeneration source are selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used. An NEreceives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration device. The regeneratedclock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input interface. The clock then works as thesystem tracing clock for the NE. In this way, clock signals are strengthened and the line clocksignals output from the NE are also strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet
The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
l The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest clockquality.
l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON clock subnettraces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
l If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority, the ASONclock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to generate multipleclock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is avoided.
l If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet traces theinternal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the entire network aresynchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure the qualityand priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure only thequality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only modify thesubnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the ASON clock subnet.
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM disabled mode,you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality and priority of the primaryreference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard SSM mode,you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primaryreference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended SSM mode,you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode. Then you should createthe ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-9
7.5 SLAThe ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection,as listed in Table 7-1. The rerouting time is related to various factors, such as the equipmenttype, number of services, available network resources, and network settings. Hence, theinformation in this table is provided as reference only.
Table 7-1 Service level
Service Protection andRestoration Scheme
ImplementationMeans
Switching andRerouting Time
Diamondservice
Protection and restoration SNCP and rerouting Switching time < 50msRerouting time < 2 s
Goldservice
Protection and restoration MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50msRerouting time < 2 s
Silverservice
Restoration Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s
Copperservice
No protectionNo restoration
- -
Ironservice
Preemptable MSP -
Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services
Service Level WorkingResource of TELink
ProtectionResource of TELink
Non-ProtectionResource of TE Link
Diamondservice
Servicecreation
Not used Not used Used
Servicererouting
Not used Used when theresource is notenough
Used with the priority
Serviceoptimization
Not used Not used Used
Goldservice
Servicecreation
Used with thepriority
Not used Used when theresource is not enough
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Service Level WorkingResource of TELink
ProtectionResource of TELink
Non-ProtectionResource of TE Link
Servicererouting
Used with thepriority
Used when theresource is notenough
Used when theresource is not enough
Serviceoptimization
Used with thepriority
Not used Used when theresource is not enough
Silverservice
Servicecreation
Not used Not used Used
Servicererouting
Not used Used when theresource is notenough
Used with the priority
Serviceoptimization
Not used Not used Used
Copperservice
Servicecreation
Not used Not used Used
Serviceoptimization
Not used Not used Used
Ironservice
Servicecreation
Not used Used with thepriority
Used when theresource is not enough
Serviceoptimization
Not used Used with thepriority
Used when theresource is not enough
7.6 Diamond ServicesDiamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in thenetwork, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicableto voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It isalso called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available betweenthe source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is theworking LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the workingLSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receivesthe service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 7-7 shows a diamond service.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-11
Figure 7-7 Diamond Services
:ASON NE
:User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
Protection LSP
Working LSP
There are three types of diamond services.l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements forcreation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between thesource node and the sink node.
Protection andrestoration
l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available fora permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP and theother is the standby LSP.
l If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reservedfor a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the servicesurvivability.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.
l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports three rerouting policies:– Use existing trails whenever possible
– Do not use existing trails whenever possible
– Best route
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, andScheduled revertive.l After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted,
the service is automatically reverted to the original path if thefault in the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, theuser can set the service to be reverted to the original path at aspecific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on theNMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the serviceis not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Service migration l Supports migration between diamond services and permanentSNCP connections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silverservices.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copperservices.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to triggerrerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements forcreation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source nodeand the sink node
Protection andrestoration
l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting isnot triggered.
l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSPfor transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggeredto create a new LSP to restore services.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-13
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.
l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports three rerouting policies:– Use existing trails whenever possible
– Do not use existing trails whenever possible
– Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and Scheduledrevertive.l After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted, the
service is automatically reverted to the original path if the fault in theoriginal path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the user canset the service to be reverted to the original path at a specific futuretime (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault inthe original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service is notreverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Servicemigration
l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCPconnections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Serviceswitching
Supports manual switching.
Serviceoptimization
Supports service optimization.
Serviceassociation
Does not support service association.
ASON servertrail
Support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to triggerrerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements forcreation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source nodeand the sink node
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Protection andrestoration
l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSPfor transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting isnot triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is nottriggered.
Servicemigration
l Supports migration between diamond services and permanent SNCPconnections.
l Supports migration between diamond services and gold services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Serviceswitching
Supports manual switching.
Serviceoptimization
Supports service optimization.
Serviceassociation
Does not support service association.
ASON servertrail
Support diamond ASON server trails.
7.7 Gold ServicesGold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamondservices, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASONtriggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails,the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 7-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-15
Figure 7-8 Gold services
R1
R2
R3
R4
:ASON NE
:User equipment
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
MSP
MSP
MSPI
Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services.
Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services
Attribute Gold Service
Requirements for creation Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources areavailable between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex sectionprotection
l Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplexsection protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linearmultiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear multiplexsection protection chain to create gold services.
l Supports using the working resources of a two-fiberbidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create goldservices.
l Supports using the working resources of a four-fiberbidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create goldservices.
Protection and restoration When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performedto protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is thentriggered to restore services.
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.
l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports three rerouting policies:– Use existing trails whenever possible
– Do not use existing trails whenever possible
– Best route
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, andScheduled revertive.l After the automatically revertive gold service is rerouted, the
service is automatically reverted to the original path if the faultin the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted, the usercan set the service to be reverted to the original path at aspecific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) onthe NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the service isnot reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and goldservices.
l Supports migration between gold services and diamondservices.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
l Supports migration between gold services and copperservices.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to triggerrerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
7.8 Silver ServicesSilver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds. The silver levelservice is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON triggersrerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 7-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut,the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence,services are protected.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-17
Figure 7-9 A silver service
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
BC
D
E
F
GH
IELSP after rerouting
Original LSP
Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services
Requirements for creation Sufficient non-protection resources are available between thesource node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create anew LSP to restore services.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.
l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports three rerouting policies:– Use existing trails whenever possible
– Do not use existing trails whenever possible
– Best route
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Revertive Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, andScheduled revertive.l After the automatically revertive silver service is rerouted, the
service is automatically reverted to the original path if thefault in the original path is rectified.
l After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted, theuser can set the service to be reverted to the original path at aspecific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) onthe NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
l After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the serviceis not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh restorationtrail
Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertivesilver trials.
Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections andsilver services.
l Supports migration between diamond services and silverservices.
l Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
l Supports migration between silver services and copperservices.
Service optimization l Supports service optimization.
l If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimizedbefore reverting to its original route.
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
7.9 Copper ServicesThe copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt servicesin holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not rerouteand are interrupted. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Copper Service
Requirements forcreation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the sourcenode and the sink node.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-19
Attribute Copper Service
Service restoration Does not support rerouting.
Service migration l Supports migration between copper services and traditional services.
l Supports migration between copper services and diamond services.
l Supports migration between copper services and gold services.
l Supports migration between copper services and silver services.
Serviceoptimization
Supports service optimization.
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports ASON server trails.
7.10 Iron ServicesThe iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as ironservices. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can beconfigured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resourcesor protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interruptedand rerouting is not triggered.l When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching
occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS isrecovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of theiron service are all reported to the T2000.
l When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources areinsufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamondservice. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service.
Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services
Attribute Iron Service
Requirementsfor creation
Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are availablebetween the source node and the sink node.
Multiplexsectionprotection
To create iron services, the following resources can be used:l Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
l Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP
l Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
l Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Attribute Iron Service
Servicerestoration
Does not support rerouting.
Servicemigration
Supports migration between iron services and extra permanentconnections.
Serviceoptimization
Supports service optimization.
7.11 TunnelsTunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASONserver trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level forthe tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to completethe configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 Tunnel
R1
R2
R3
R4
VC4 tunnel VC12 service
: ASON NE
: User equipmentASON domain
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Itscross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. Asshown in Figure 7-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a diamond ASONserver trail, a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail.During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 andthe timeslots of the line boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connectionfrom the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels,
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-21
however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the newports.
NOTE
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12
NE1 NE2
VC12ASON server trail
VC4
VC12
Cross-connection
Line unitTributary unit
Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.
Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels
Attribute DiamondTunnel
Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel CopperTunnel
Requirements forcreation
Same as diamondservices
Same as goldservices
Same as silverservices
Same as copperservices
Servicerestoration
Same as diamondservices
Same as goldservices
Same as silverservices
Does notsupportrerouting
Rerouting l Supportsreroutinglockout.
l Supportsreroutingpriority.
l Supportsreroutinglockout.
l Supportsreroutingpriority.
l Supportsreroutinglockout.
l Supportsreroutingpriority.
Does notsupportrerouting
Revertive Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Pre-configuration ofrestoringroute
Supported Supported Supported Not supported
Serviceassociation
Not supported Not supported Supported Supported
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Attribute DiamondTunnel
Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel CopperTunnel
Servicemigration
l Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections.
l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and gold tunnels.
l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and silver tunnels.
l Supports migration between diamond tunnels and copper tunnels.
l Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.
l Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.
l Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Serviceoptimization
Supports service optimization.
Tunnellevel
VC-4
7.12 Service AssociationThe service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different pointsinto the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. Duringthe rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of theassociated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed fromtwo points.
As shown in Figure 7-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber betweenB and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
Figure 7-12 Service association
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
AB
C
D
E
F
GH
I
1+1 protection
1+1 protection
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-23
Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 7-11 Attributes of service association
Attribute Service Association
Service creation Supports the creation of the associated services with the same sourcenode.
Serviceoptimization
Supports optimization of associated services.
Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.
Service type l Supports the association of two silver services.
l Supports association of two copper services.
l Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.
l Supports the association of two silver tunnels.
l Supports the association of two copper tunnels.
l Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
7.13 Service OptimizationAfter the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thusrequires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching theoptimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize theservice without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during theservice optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
l Only manual optimization is supported.
l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
l During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.
l During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,optimization is not allowed.
l The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper andtunnel services.
7.14 Service MigrationOptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services andtraditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interruptthe services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent ConnectionsCurrently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
l Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections
l Migration between gold services and permanent connections
l Migration between silver services and permanent connections
l Migration between copper services and permanent connections
l Migration between iron services and permanent connections
l Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
Service Migration between ASON TrailsCurrently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper service
l Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper tunnels
7.15 Reverting Services to Original RoutesAfter many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.You can revert all service to the original routes.
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. Ifthe original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted tothe original route manually.
7.16 Preset Restoring TrailCustomers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. Tothis end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This functionhelps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold ASON trail.When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail firstly.
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration TrailFor a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, thesilver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a sharedmesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses theresources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable,these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared meshrestoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restorationtrail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 7-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services sharethe TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes,the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertivesilver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared meshrestoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-25
Figure 7-13 Shared mesh restoration trail
Revertive silver service 1
Share MESHrestoration trail 1
A B C
G
D E F
H
Revertive silver service 2
Share MESHrestoration trail 2
Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration TrailThe shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
l Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail.
l A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive attributecannot be changed.
l The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources ofTE links.
l For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the presetrestoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration TrailThe shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.l For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources
are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be usedby other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used.
l For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resourcescannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort.In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails fordifferent services can share some resources.
7.18 Shared Risk Link GroupIn the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks,that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be reroutedto another link that has the same risk.
7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
7-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network soas to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the samerisk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can changethe SRLG attribute.
7.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCASThe ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCASLCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNKcan be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 7-14, VCTRUNK1is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 inpath 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the serviceof VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.
Figure 7-14 LCAS (different path)
Router BRouter A NE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
Path 1
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. Asshown in Figure 7-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernetservice remains unaffected.
Figure 7-15 LCAS (same path)
Router BRouter ANE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
ASON Trail GroupAn ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSPgroup. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual serviceswith the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASONtrail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trailsmust also be as separated as possible.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-27
8 Configuration and Networking
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the equipment configuration and typical networking application of theOptiX OSN 9500.
8.1 Equipment ConfigurationThis topic describes the basic principles of configuring the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment.
8.2 Typical Networking ApplicationThis topic describes the typical networking application of the OptiX OSN 9500 in the case ofdifferent network topologies and service types.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 8 Configuration and Networking
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
8.1 Equipment ConfigurationThis topic describes the basic principles of configuring the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment.
Equipment configuration refers to configuring the equipment based on the networkingrequirement and equipment functions.
The OptiX OSN 9500 is configured according to the following principles:
l The total number of slots is fixed. The access capacity is different for the slots of variousinterface boards. You can configure the equipment according to the requirements to usethe slot resource completely.
l The STM-1/STM-4 service supports the linear multiplex section protection (MSP) insteadof the ring MSP.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 equipment plays an essential role in the communication network.For this reason, hot backup schemes should be adopted to protect certain key boards (forexample, the GXCH, EXCH, GXCL, EXCL, JSTG, and JPIU board).
Table 8-1 lists the basic board configuration resources.
Table 8-1 Board configuration resources
Board Remarks
D64E/D64D Optional boards.
L64E/JL64
F64E/F64D
O16E/O16D
Q16E/JQ16
D16E/JD16
L16E/JL16
L16L/L16V
JH41
JLQ4
JLH1
JLHE
EGT6/EGT6A
GE06
EGTH
EGS8
EAS1
8 Configuration and NetworkingOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Board Remarks
GXCH Mandatory boards. You can select either the GXCH or EXCH board,not both of them. The 1+1 hot backup is provided for protection.
EXCH
GXCL Optional boards. You can select either the GXCH or EXCH board,not both of them. The 1+1 hot backup is provided for protection.
EXCL
JSCC Mandatory boards. You can select either the GXCH or EXCH board,not both of them. The 1+1 warm backup is provided for protection.
ESCC
JSTG Mandatory board. The 1+1 hot backup is provided for protection.
JSTI Optional board.
JEOW Optional board.
JCOM Mandatory board.
JPIU Mandatory board. The 1+1 hot backup is provided for protection.
EMPU Mandatory board.
JPBU Mandatory board.
JFAN Mandatory board.
JDCU Optional board.
JBPA Optional board.
JBA2 Optional board.
8.2 Typical Networking ApplicationThis topic describes the typical networking application of the OptiX OSN 9500 in the case ofdifferent network topologies and service types.
8.2.1 Networking Topology StructureThe OptiX OSN 9500 integrates the functions of MADM and DXC in one subrack. The OptiXOSN 9500 has powerful cross-connect capability, comprehensive interface functions, andsophisticated and advanced software, which endow it with good adaptation to complex networkstructure.
8.2.2 Networking for Multi-Granularity Service Grooming, Service Convergence andBandwidth SwitchingThe OptiX OSN 9500 can provide the networking application of the multi-granularity servicegrooming and service convergence functions.
8.2.3 Networking Application of Ethernet ServicesThe networking application of Ethernet services includes point-to-point networking for the GEservice, Layer 2 switching networking for the GE service, transparent transmission networkingfor the GE service, and networking for convergence of multiple GE services to a 10xGE service.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 8 Configuration and Networking
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
8.2.4 Networking with SDH Equipment to Be the Metropolitan Backbone NodeThe OptiX OSN 9500 node features powerful service grooming capability, lower cost, andstronger survivability. It can simplify the networking topology and can be deployed in a hybridnetwork together with the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX 2500+ (Metro 3000) or OptiX 10G (Metro5000) product. Working with the end-to-end trail management function of the OptiX iManagerT2000, the OptiX OSN 9500 can be operated and maintained in simpler and more convenientmanner.
8.2.5 Networking with DWDM Equipment to Be the Supertrunk Backbone NodeThe OptiX OSN 9500 can work with the OptiX BWS 320 and the OptiX BWS 1600 to increasethe regenerator-free span-crossing distance and to lower the cost of investment.
8.2.1 Networking Topology StructureThe OptiX OSN 9500 integrates the functions of MADM and DXC in one subrack. The OptiXOSN 9500 has powerful cross-connect capability, comprehensive interface functions, andsophisticated and advanced software, which endow it with good adaptation to complex networkstructure.
As a large-capacity switch of optical network bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 9500 is applicable tovarious network topologies, such as point-to-point, chain, ring, hub and mesh networks.Therefore, the OptiX OSN 9500 has a flexible capability to form a network. The chain, ring andmesh networks are the basic network topologies. A variety of complex network topologies canbe derived from these basic network topologies in actual applications. Table 8-2 lists the logicalnetwork mode of the OptiX OSN 9500 product.
Table 8-2 Network topology
No.
TopologyType
Topology
1 Chain
2 Ring
8 Configuration and NetworkingOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
No.
TopologyType
Topology
3 Tangent rings
4 Intersectingrings
5 Ring withchain
6 Dualnodeinterconnection (DNI)
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 8 Configuration and Networking
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-5
No.
TopologyType
Topology
7 Hub
8 Mesh
Legends:
OptiX OSN 9500
The mesh network uses the bandwidth most efficiently, improving robustness of the wholenetwork.
With powerful cross-connect and access capability, the OptiX OSN 9500 supports signals atvarious rates and networking application of multiple rings. It can support up to 36 x STM-64two-fiber rings or 18 x STM-64 four-fiber rings, or 144 x STM-16 two-fiber rings or 72 x STM-16four-fiber rings.
The following sections describe the typical networking of the OptiX OSN 9500 on themetropolitan backbone nodes, (which functions essential service grooming) instead of thecommon or simple networking of the equipment.
8 Configuration and NetworkingOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
8-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
8.2.2 Networking for Multi-Granularity Service Grooming, ServiceConvergence and Bandwidth Switching
The OptiX OSN 9500 can provide the networking application of the multi-granularity servicegrooming and service convergence functions.
Figure 8-1 shows the networking application of the multi-granularity service grooming andservice convergence functions of the OptiX OSN 9500. The OptiX OSN 9500 implements thelarge-capacity grooming of STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1 services. The OptiX OSN 9500can form a hybrid network with different equipment such as MADM, ADM, and MSTP.
Figure 8-1 Networking configuration of the OptiX OSN 9500 performing multi-granularityservice grooming and service convergence
Central Office
MSTP
DWDM
OptiX OSN 9500
iManagerT2000/T2100
ADM
Router
MADM
8.2.3 Networking Application of Ethernet ServicesThe networking application of Ethernet services includes point-to-point networking for the GEservice, Layer 2 switching networking for the GE service, transparent transmission networkingfor the GE service, and networking for convergence of multiple GE services to a 10xGE service.
Point-to-Point Networking for the GE ServiceA large and flexible bandwidth is required by Internet service provider (ISP) and applicationservice provider (ASP) for efficient service connection. The OptiX OSN 9500 provides a direct
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 8 Configuration and Networking
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-7
GE service interface. Therefore, the point-to-point transmission of the Ethernet services over along distance can be realized over the SDH networks.
Figure 8-2 shows the flexible networking modes of the OptiX OSN 9500. The network can bea chain, a ring, a mesh network or a combination of these three modes.
Figure 8-2 Point-to-point connection of the GE service
Router
OptiX OSN9500
Point to pointconnection path
Layer 2 Switching Networking for the GE ServiceThe OptiX OSN 9500 equipment provides the Layer 2 switching boards to achieve the Layer 2switching from a GE service to a GE service.
8 Configuration and NetworkingOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
8-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 8-3 Layer 2 switching networking for the GE service
RouterOptiX OSN 9500
GE access
GE accessGE access
Transparent Transmission Networking for the GE ServiceThe Layer 2 switching boards of the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment can transparently transmit theGE service. Moreover, it can be directly accessed to a router.
Figure 8-4 Transparent transmission of GE services
N*GE
N*GE
OptiX OSN 9500
Networking for Convergence of Multiple GE Services to a 10xGE ServiceThe Layer 2 switching boards of the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment can be used to convergemultiple GE services to a 10GE service. After the service is transmitted out from the 10xGEinterface, the Layer 2 switching boards can be directly interconnected to the P/PE router.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 8 Configuration and Networking
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-9
Figure 8-5 Converging multiple GE services to a 10xGE service
N*GE
N*GE
10GEN*GE
RouterOptiX OSN9500
PE Router
8.2.4 Networking with SDH Equipment to Be the MetropolitanBackbone Node
The OptiX OSN 9500 node features powerful service grooming capability, lower cost, andstronger survivability. It can simplify the networking topology and can be deployed in a hybridnetwork together with the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX 2500+ (Metro 3000) or OptiX 10G (Metro5000) product. Working with the end-to-end trail management function of the OptiX iManagerT2000, the OptiX OSN 9500 can be operated and maintained in simpler and more convenientmanner.
Figure 8-6 shows the network that involves the OptiX OSN 9500, the OptiX 10G MADMs, andthe OptiX 2.5G MADMs.
The abundant service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500 meet the demand for grooming servicesin the metropolitan backbone network. The OptiX OSN 9500 can access the STM-64, STM-16,STM-4, STM-1, GE or 10GE services. The OptiX OSN 9500 can work with other SDH productsof Huawei to form multiple MADMs.
8 Configuration and NetworkingOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
8-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 8-6 Network of the OptiX OSN 9500 combined with the OptiX 10G and OptiX 2.5GMADMs
OptiX OSN9500
STM-64 bidirectionalMSP ring
Other Huawei SDHproduct
8.2.5 Networking with DWDM Equipment to Be the SupertrunkBackbone Node
The OptiX OSN 9500 can work with the OptiX BWS 320 and the OptiX BWS 1600 to increasethe regenerator-free span-crossing distance and to lower the cost of investment.
Figure 8-7 shows the network that involves the OptiX OSN 9500 and the DWDM equipment.
Figure 8-7 Networking application of the OptiX OSN 9500 and the DWDM equipment
DWDM OLAOptiX OSN9500
ADM
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 8 Configuration and Networking
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-11
9 Protection
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the equipment-level protection, network-level protection and clockprotection of the OptiX OSN 9500.
9.1 Equipment-Level ProtectionThis topic describes the equipment-level protection scheme of the OptiX OSN 9500.
9.2 Network-Level ProtectionThis topic describes the network-level protection scheme of the OptiX OSN 9500.
9.3 Clock Synchronization ProtectionThis topic describes the clock protection of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of the protectionprinciple and compliant protocols.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 9 Protection
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
9.1 Equipment-Level ProtectionThis topic describes the equipment-level protection scheme of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The following sections describe the equipment-level protection schemes of the OptiX OSN 9500.
9.1.1 Hot Backup 1+1 Redundancy Protection for Key Functional ModulesThe OptiX OSN 9500 protects the key functional modules in a hot-backup redundancy manner.When the working board fails, the system automatically switches the services that are preset tobe protected to the protection board. This working/protection scheme is called the 1+1 hot backupmode.
9.1.2 Protection Against Abnormal ConditionsThe protection against abnormal conditions includes maintenance alarm for abnormality, powersupply protection, protection on CPU power-off and software reset, power failure resumingprotection and break-point resuming protection, and software upgrading protection.
9.1.3 Data SecurityThe OptiX OSN 9500 ensures data security by performing the unified management over thedata, data check function, hierarchical protection function, and periodical backup function.
9.1.1 Hot Backup 1+1 Redundancy Protection for Key FunctionalModules
The OptiX OSN 9500 protects the key functional modules in a hot-backup redundancy manner.When the working board fails, the system automatically switches the services that are preset tobe protected to the protection board. This working/protection scheme is called the 1+1 hot backupmode.
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the equipment-level service protection for the followingfunctional modules:
l 1+1 hot backup for the GXCH and EXCH boards
l 1+1 hot backup for the GXCL and EXCL boards
l 1+1 hot backup for the JSTG board
l 1+1 warm backup for the JSCC and ESCC boards
l The DLAG protection for the EGS8 and EAS1 boards
l 1+1 hot backup for the JPIU board
l The JPBU board supports the centralized backup for the line board, the JCOM board, theJEOW board, and the power module of the optical power amplifying board.
l The power supply system supports two –48V/–60V DC working power inputs that are ofmutual backup. The equipment can still work normally when either of the two externalpower inputs fails.
9.1.2 Protection Against Abnormal ConditionsThe protection against abnormal conditions includes maintenance alarm for abnormality, powersupply protection, protection on CPU power-off and software reset, power failure resumingprotection and break-point resuming protection, and software upgrading protection.
9 ProtectionOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
9-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
l Maintenance alarm for abnormality
When the system is abnormal, and when the hardware or software has detected the abnormality,an alarm is generated to notify the network monitoring terminal.
l Power supply protection
The equipment provides protection against reverse polarity for the power supply. Moreover,some devices are provided on the JPIU board for protection against overvoltage, undervoltageand lightning. As a result, any possible abnormities can be prevented from damaging the systemand the power supply.
The system provides all the boards with active and standby -48V voltages and providesundervoltage protection to minimize service interruption caused by the damage of board powermodule.
The system can also detect the ambient working temperature and voltage information of theboards through the MBUS unit. Except for the JPIU board, all other boards are hot-swappableand powered by high-frequency power modules in an effective and reliable manner. Moreover,these boards have the overcurrent and overvoltage protection function.
l Protection on CPU power-off and software reset
The static random access memory (SRAM) database or FLASH database is used to providebackup for the program and data files of application software, so the exact program and data canbe recovered from the backup database after CPU power failure or software reset.
l Power failure resuming protection and break-point resuming protection
The basic input/output system (BIOS) of the board is write protected, that is, no modification isallowed. The program and data files of application software, which can be loaded on-line, havethe check function to avoid incorrect data transmission. When the software loading process isinterrupted, the software waits to be loaded in break-point resuming mode.
l Software upgrading protection
Two copies of NE software are stored in the system control & communication (SCC) board.Therefore, the software of a new version can be loaded without affecting the running of thecurrent software. The software of the old version is replaced by the software of the new versionafter it is confirmed correct. This replacement does not affect the preset configurationinformation or the services in the NE equipment. The software of the old version continues tofunction if it fails to be upgraded.
9.1.3 Data SecurityThe OptiX OSN 9500 ensures data security by performing the unified management over thedata, data check function, hierarchical protection function, and periodical backup function.
l The security is improved by adopting the database module to perform unified managementover the data.
l Both the database and database files have their own data check function.
l The database files are provided with hierarchical protection according to the importanceof the data. Therefore, the errors in the lower-level database do not affect the higher-leveldatabase.
l One backup database is provided in the SRAM, and two backup databases (namely, fdb0and fdb1) are provided in the flash memory. The two backup databases are mutually
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 9 Protection
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-3
protected in the flash memory. Moreover, they are backed up every 30 minutes in theSRAM.
9.2 Network-Level ProtectionThis topic describes the network-level protection scheme of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 features excellent self-healing network protection. It provides multipleprotection schemes at the SDH layer upon optical fiber cut, line board damage or node failure.
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the following protection schemes stated in ITU-TRecommendation and other international standards:
l 1+1 or 1:N (N≤ 14) linear multiplex section protection (MSP)
l Self-healing ring protection (two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring, two-fiberunidirectional MS dedicated protection ring, four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protectionring, and transoceanic MSP ring. Two-fiber ring and four-fiber ring can be formed in theSTM-64 and STM-16 services
l Inter-ring and interconnection service protection in DNI mode
l Subnet connection protection (SNCP) and subnet connection tunneling protection(SNCTP)
l Mesh networking and rerouting protection
The following sections describe various network-level protection schemes of the OptiX OSN9500.
9.2.1 Linear MSPThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports both 1+1 and 1:N (N≤ 14) linear MSP protection schemes. Theswitching time is less than 50 ms, which meets the requirement stated in ITU-TRecommendation..
9.2.2 Self-Healing Ring ProtectionA self-healing ring is of the ring network type. The self-healing rings supported by the OptiXOSN 9500 are the two-fiber unidirectional MS protection ring, two-fiber bidirectional MS sharedprotection ring, four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring, and transoceanic MSP ring.The transoceanic MSP ring is a self-healing ring based on the two-fiber and four-fiberbidirectional MS shared protection rings.
9.2.3 Inter-Ring Interconnection Service ProtectionThe inter-ring interconnection service can be classified into two modes: single nodeinterconnection (SNI) and dual node interconnection (DNI).
9.2.4 Subnet Connection Protection and Subnet Connection Tunneling ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 9500 features powerful higher order cross-connect and overhead processingcapability, which helps realize SNCP.
9.2.5 Mesh Networking and Rerouting ProtectionThe mesh network solves the node bottleneck and failure. Multiple routes are available betweentwo nodes, thus providing high reliability. The switching time is less than a few seconds.
9.2.1 Linear MSPThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports both 1+1 and 1:N (N≤ 14) linear MSP protection schemes. Theswitching time is less than 50 ms, which meets the requirement stated in ITU-TRecommendation..
9 ProtectionOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
9-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 9-1 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 9-1 Linear MSP parameters
ProtectionType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
SwitchingTime
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition
1+1 single-endedswitching
Non-revertive
Notrequired
≤ 50 ms - Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOSl R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SD
(optional)l Forced
switchingl Manual
switchingl Exercise
switching
1+1 single-endedswitching
Revertive Notrequired
≤ 50 ms 600s
1+1 dual-endedswitching
Non-revertive
APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms -
1+1 dual-endedswitching
Revertive APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
1:N dual-endedswitching (N≤ 14)
Revertive APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
9.2.2 Self-Healing Ring ProtectionA self-healing ring is of the ring network type. The self-healing rings supported by the OptiXOSN 9500 are the two-fiber unidirectional MS protection ring, two-fiber bidirectional MS sharedprotection ring, four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring, and transoceanic MSP ring.The transoceanic MSP ring is a self-healing ring based on the two-fiber and four-fiberbidirectional MS shared protection rings.
l Two-fiber unidirectional MS protection ring
A two-fiber unidirectional MS protection ring is also called an MS dedicated protectionring. It consists of two optical fibers. One fiber (S) forms the working ring to transmitservice signals, and the other fiber (P) forms a dedicated protection ring to transmit servicesignals in the opposite direction.
A ring network is protected on the basis of MS. That is, the service is switched dependingon the quality of MS signals.
Service signals between two nodes are transmitted unidirectionally. Normally, a service iscarried on the working ring. It is, however, switched to the protection ring if a fault occurs.The switching time is less than 50 ms.
The advantage of a two-fiber MSP ring lies in that the standby fiber can be used to transmitthe extra service, thus enlarging transmission capacity of the ring network to up to 2×STM-N. The standby fiber (P) is in an absolutely idle status because no service signals are carried
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 9 Protection
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-5
on it. The extra service transmitted on this protection ring actually expands the transmissioncapacity of the ring.
l Two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ringA two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring is also called a MSP shared protectionring. It contains two fibers. Each fiber uses half of its capacity for the service, and anotherhalf for protecting the working path of another fiber in the opposite direction.Service signals between two nodes are transmitted bidirectionally. A ring network isprotected on the basis of MS.Normally, service signals are transmitted in the ring network formed by the working paththat contains two fibers. If the network fails, the services are switched from the workingpath to the protection path of another fiber. The switching time in a two-fiber protectionring composed of the OptiX OSN 9500 is less than 50 ms, meeting the requirement of ITU-T Recommendation.The most outstanding advantage of a two-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring isthat the timeslots can be re-used, which increases the transmission capacity of the ring upto k/2×STM-N (k is the total number of nodes on the ring network). Moreover, theprotection paths can be used to transmit extra services. Normally, the protection paths P1and P2 are idle and they can be used to transmit extra services.A two-fiber bidirectional MS protection ring is especially suitable to configure a networkwith decentralized traffic flows. That is, the traffic flows between nodes (especiallybetween adjacent nodes) are dense and evenly distributed in the ring network.
l Four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ringA four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring consists of four fibers: S1, S2, P1 andP2. The first two fibers form the working ring and the latter two form the protection ring(in the same or opposite direction).Service signals between two points are transmitted bidirectionally. The MS is taken as thebasis for the ring network protection.Normally, a service is transmitted on the working ring. When a fault occurs, the service isswitched from the working fiber to the protection fiber. The switching time is less than 50ms.A four-fiber bidirectional MS shared protection ring has the following three advantages:– The timeslots can be re-used to increase the transmission capacity up to k x STM-N.
The k is the total number of nodes on the ring.– Extra traffic can be transmitted over the protection fibers P1 and P2.
– Span protection scheme is supported by the ring network.
l Transoceanic MSP ringA transoceanic MSP ring can be a two-fiber bi-directional shared MSP ring or a four-fiberbidirectional shared MSP ring. When the network fails, the ring path is switched betweenthe source and sink nodes of the service rather than on two adjacent nodes of the failednode to avoid multiple transoceanic events of the services, which increase the delay oftransmission in the long-haul transmission network (for example, the marine system). Theswitching time is 0–300 ms.
Table 9-2 lists the MSP ring parameters.
9 ProtectionOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
9-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 9-2 MSP ring parameters
ProtectionType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingMode
Switching Time
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition
Two-fiberbidirectionalMSP
Revertive l Forcedswitching
l Manualswitching
l Exerciseswitching
≤ 50 ms 600s Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOSl R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SDl Forced
switchingl Manual
switchingl Exercise
switching
Two-fiberunidirectional MSP
Revertive l Forcedswitching
l Manualswitching
l Exerciseswitching
≤ 50 ms 600s
Four-fiberbidirectionalMSP
Revertive l Forcedswitching -ring
l Manualswitching -ring
l Exerciseswitching -ring
l Forcedswitching -span
l Manualswitching -span
l Exerciseswitching -span
≤ 50 ms 600s
9.2.3 Inter-Ring Interconnection Service ProtectionThe inter-ring interconnection service can be classified into two modes: single nodeinterconnection (SNI) and dual node interconnection (DNI).
In the DNI mode, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides a fully ITU-T G.842-compliant protection forthe inter-ring interconnection service.
The DNI has an advantage of protecting the traffic crossing from one ring to the other, andespecially for the node failure.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 9 Protection
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-7
9.2.4 Subnet Connection Protection and Subnet ConnectionTunneling Protection
The OptiX OSN 9500 features powerful higher order cross-connect and overhead processingcapability, which helps realize SNCP.
In addition, the OptiX OSN 9500 supports SNCTP. In the network, an end-to-end higher orderVC-4 path of an NE can be specified, and the working and protection paths can be configured.As a result, the 1+1 protection of a service is achieved. When the working path fails, the serviceis automatically switched to the protection path. The switching time is less than 50 ms. Therefore,the service is quickly protected.
Table 9-3 lists the SNCP parameters of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 9-3 SNCP parameters
Protection Type
RevertiveMode
SwitchingTime
DefaultWTR Time
Switching Conditions(Any of the following alarmstriggers the switching)
SNCP Revertive ≤50 ms 600s LP_UNEQ (the default switchingcondition)Any of the following alarms triggersthe SNCP switching at the VC-4level:l R_LOSl R_LOFl R_LOCl MS_AISl B2_EXCl AU_AISl AU_LOPl B3_EXC (Optional)l B3_SD (Optional)l HP_UNEQ (Optional)l HP_TIM (Optional)Any of the following alarms triggersthe SNCP switching at the VC-3level:l TU_LOPl TU_AISl B3_EXC (Optional)l B3_SD (Optional)Any of the following alarms triggersthe SNCP switching at the VC-12level:
9 ProtectionOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
9-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Protection Type
RevertiveMode
SwitchingTime
DefaultWTR Time
Switching Conditions(Any of the following alarmstriggers the switching)
Non-revertive
≤50 ms - l TU_LOPl TU_AISl BIP_EXC (Optional)l BIP_SD (Optional)
9.2.5 Mesh Networking and Rerouting ProtectionThe mesh network solves the node bottleneck and failure. Multiple routes are available betweentwo nodes, thus providing high reliability. The switching time is less than a few seconds.
Compared with the ring network, the mesh network features the following advantages:
l Excellent bandwidth availability, scalability and survivability.
l This network topology is suitable for the area at which the traffic is heavy and evenlydistributed.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 9 Protection
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-9
CAUTIONThe rerouting protection function is available only when the ASON features are enabled.
9.3 Clock Synchronization ProtectionThis topic describes the clock protection of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of the protectionprinciple and compliant protocols.
In the SDH synchronous network, the clocks of the NEs should be synchronized. Usually, severalreference clock sources are available for an NE. They may come from the same primary clocksource or from the clock reference sources of different quality levels.
When the synchronization status message (SSM) function is enabled, an NE needs to know thequality information of all the clock reference sources to automatically switch the synchronousclock source.
The S1 byte defined in ITU-T Recommendation is used to transmit the quality information ofthe clock source. Bits b5–b8 in the S1 byte indicate the quality information of 16 timing sources.Table 9-4 lists the SSM encoding mode defined in ITU-T Recommendation. With this qualityinformation and together with certain switching protocols, the automatic protection switchingof the synchronization clock can be realized in the synchronous network.
Table 9-4 SSM encoding mode
S1 (b5-b8) Level of SDH Synchronization Quality
0000 The synchronization quality is unknown in the existingsynchronous network.
0001 Reserved.
0010 G.811 clock signal.
0011 Reserved.
0100 G.812 transit exchange clock signal.
0101 Reserved.
0110 Reserved.
0111 Reserved.
1000 G.812 Local office clock signal.
1001 Reserved.
1010 Reserved.
1011 Synchronous equipment timing source (SETS) signal.
1100 Reserved.
1101 Reserved.
9 ProtectionOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
9-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
S1 (b5-b8) Level of SDH Synchronization Quality
1110 Reserved.
1111 Do not use for synchronization.
In the SDH system, the automatic clock protection switching complies with the protocols:
l An NE selects a clock source of the highest level in the S1 byte from all current availableclock sources. Then the NE transmits its quality information (namely, the S1 byte) to thedownstream NEs.
l When the S1 byte information contained in multiple clock sources in the NE is the same,the system selects the clock source of the highest priority level based on the priority orderin the priority level table as the synchronization source. It then transmits the qualityinformation of this synchronization source to the downstream NEs.
l If NE B currently traces the clock synchronous source of NE A, the clock of NE B is anunusable synchronous source for NE A.
For more information about clock protection, see section 10.4 Clock Protection .
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 9 Protection
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-11
10 Clock
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the clock of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of optional clock sources,clock working and output modes and how to realize clock protection switching.
10.1 Clock SourceThis topic describes the clock source types of the OptiX OSN 9500.
10.2 Clock Working ModeThis topic describes the clock working modes of the OptiX OSN 9500.
10.3 Clock OutputsThis topic describes the clock output modes of the OptiX OSN 9500.
10.4 Clock ProtectionThis topic describes the clock protection implementation of the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 10 Clock
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-1
10.1 Clock SourceThis topic describes the clock source types of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 can trace the following clock sources:
l External clock source
l Line clock source
l Internal clock source
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the internal clock source isof the lowest priority.
10.1.1 External Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports two external clock source inputs.
10.1.2 Line Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 9500 can trace the line clock source.
10.1.3 Internal Clock SourceWhen both the external clock source and line clock source fail, the internal clock source providesclock signal for the OptiX OSN 9500.
10.1.1 External Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports two external clock source inputs.
l Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
l Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
10.1.2 Line Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 9500 can trace the line clock source.
10.1.3 Internal Clock SourceWhen both the external clock source and line clock source fail, the internal clock source providesclock signal for the OptiX OSN 9500.
10.2 Clock Working ModeThis topic describes the clock working modes of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the following clock working modes that comply with ITU-T G.781.
l Locked mode
l Holdover mode
l Free-run mode
10 ClockOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
10-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
10.2.1 Locked ModeIn the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 9500 traces one clock source from the line clock source orexternal clock source.
10.2.2 Holdover ModeIf all clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 9500 uses the frequency information stored beforethe loss as its clock source. This meets the relevant criteria stated in ITU-T G.813.
10.2.3 Free-Run ModeThe OptiX OSN 9500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whosefrequency stability is within the range of ±4.6 ppm.
10.2.1 Locked ModeIn the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 9500 traces one clock source from the line clock source orexternal clock source.
An ASON NE not only supports the traditional clock tracing mode, but also supports the ASONclock tracing mode. For details, see 7.4 ASON Clock Tracing.
10.2.2 Holdover ModeIf all clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 9500 uses the frequency information stored beforethe loss as its clock source. This meets the relevant criteria stated in ITU-T G.813.
10.2.3 Free-Run ModeThe OptiX OSN 9500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whosefrequency stability is within the range of ±4.6 ppm.
10.3 Clock OutputsThis topic describes the clock output modes of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the following clock outputs:
l Line clock outputs
l External clock outputs
l The OptiX OSN 9500 supports two external clock outputs.
l Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
l Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
NOTE
Either two 75-ohm clock outputs or two 120-ohm clock outputs but never both can be used.
10.4 Clock ProtectionThis topic describes the clock protection implementation of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 provides the synchronization status message (SSM) function tosynchronize clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured to realizethe protection switching of clocks.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 10 Clock
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-3
The OptiX OSN 9500 can realize the clock protection switching in the following ways:
l SSM not enabled
l Standard SSM enabled
l Extended SSM enabled
10.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not EnabledWhen the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. The OptiX OSN 9500selects and switches the clock source according to the priority list. The clock source of the highestpriority is the trace source.
10.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM EnabledThe standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 9500 to choose the clock source of the highest qualityto prevent the generation of clock lock ring.
10.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM EnabledHuawei presents the concept of the clock source ID. The extended SSM uses the first four bitsof the S1 byte as the unique clock source ID, which is transmitted along with SSM. Whenreceiving the S1 byte, a node checks whether the clock source ID is transmitted by itself. If yes,the node takes the clock source as unavailable. In this way, the clock lock ring is avoided wherethe clock tracing trails are configured as a ring.
10.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not EnabledWhen the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. The OptiX OSN 9500selects and switches the clock source according to the priority list. The clock source of the highestpriority is the trace source.
The priority list can be manually configured. For the case where the SSM is not enabled, Figure10-1 shows the clock networking and Table 10-1 lists the priority list.
10 ClockOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
10-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 10-1 Clock networking with SSM disabled
BITS
Node 2
Node 3
Node 1
Node 4
E W
W
E
EW
W
E
Active tracing trail
Standby tracing trail
Optix OSN 9500
Table 10-1 Priority list with the SSM not enabled
Node Clock Priority
Node 1 BITS/internal clock source
Node 2 West clock source/internal clock source
Node 3 West clock source/internal clock source
Node 4 East clock source/west clock source/internal clock source
10.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM EnabledThe standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 9500 to choose the clock source of the highest qualityto prevent the generation of clock lock ring.
See the Figure 10-2 and Table 10-2.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 10 Clock
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-5
Figure 10-2 Clock networking with standard SSM enabled
Node 2
Node 3
Node 1
Node 4
E W
W
E
EW
W
E
Active BITS
Standby BITSActive tracing trail
Standby tracing trail
Optix OSN 9500
Table 10-2 Clock priority list with standard SSM enabled
Node Clock Priority
Node 1 Active BITS/east clock source/internal clock source
Node 2 West clock source/east clock source/internal clock source
Node 3 West clock source/standby BITS/internal clock source
Node 4 East clock source/west clock source/internal clock source
10.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM EnabledHuawei presents the concept of the clock source ID. The extended SSM uses the first four bitsof the S1 byte as the unique clock source ID, which is transmitted along with SSM. Whenreceiving the S1 byte, a node checks whether the clock source ID is transmitted by itself. If yes,the node takes the clock source as unavailable. In this way, the clock lock ring is avoided wherethe clock tracing trails are configured as a ring.
As shown in Figure 10-3, the active and standby BITSs in the intersecting rings are connectedto the conjunction nodes respectively. The extended SSM is enabled in the entire network. Table
10 ClockOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
10-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
10-3 lists the clock priority for each NE. The active BITS clock ID is manually set to 1, thestandby BITS clock ID to 2 and the ID of the internal clock of Node1 to 3.
Table 10-3 Clock priority list with extended SSM enabled
Node Clock Priority
Node 1 Active BITS/W1/E2/E1/W2/internal clock source
Node 2 West clock source/east clock source/internal clock source
Node 3 West clock source/east clock source/internal clock source
Node 4 West clock source/east clock source/internal clock source
Node 5 Standby BITS/E1/W2/W1/E2/internal clock source
Node 6 East clock source/west clock source/internal clock source
Node 7 East clock source/west clock source/internal clock source
Node 8 East clock source/west clock source/internal clock source
Figure 10-3 Clock tracing of intersecting rings with extended SSM enabled
Node 3
Node 4
Node 2
E W
W
E
EW
E1Node 1
Node 6
Node 8
Node 7
E W
EW
W
E
W1
E1
E2
E2
W2
W1
Node 5W2
Active BITS
Standby BITS
Active tracing trail
Standby tracing trail
In the case of clock protection configuration for an SDH ring network, the clock ID is alwaysset manually to effectively avoid the occurrence of clock lock ring. The clock ID is necessaryonly at key nodes rather than all nodes in an SDH network. To set the clock source ID, followthe rules:
l Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS.
l Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external BITS.
l If signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the internalclock source of every junction node.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 10 Clock
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-7
l If signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the lineclock source (if any is involved at a conjunction node) in the signal traveling direction atevery junction node.
10 ClockOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
10-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
11 OAM
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the operation, maintenance, network management and securitymanagement of the OptiX OSN 9500.
11.1 Operation and MaintenanceThe cabinet, boards, and functions of the OptiX OSN 9500 are designed according to therequirements of the customers to easily operate and maintain the equipment. Hence, the OptiXOSN 9500 provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for the customers.
11.2 Network ManagementThis topic describes the network management system used by the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 11 OAM
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-1
11.1 Operation and MaintenanceThe cabinet, boards, and functions of the OptiX OSN 9500 are designed according to therequirements of the customers to easily operate and maintain the equipment. Hence, the OptiXOSN 9500 provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for the customers.
l In the case of an emergency, the EMPU board generates audible and visual alarms to promptthe network administrators to take proper measures.
l To facilitate maintenance, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides 16 alarm inputs, four alarmoutputs, and alarm concatenation.
l Each board provides the running and alarm indicators to help the network administratorsto locate and handle faults immediately after the faults occur.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDHand Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
l When a fiber that connects two optical interface is cut, an R-LOS alarm is genarated at theoptical interface at the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of thetransmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, only thelaser pulse is generated at 60-second intervals and lasts for 2s every time.
l After the fiber connection recovers, the optical interface at the opposite end detects thelaser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the oppositeend then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beam launched bythe opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches laser beam. Asa result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarmis cleared.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH andEthernet optical interfaces.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the function of querying parameters of SDH opticalmodules. These parameters include the optical interface type, fiber mode (single-mode ormulti-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate and wavelength.
l The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-mode or multi-mode optical modules as required. This facilitates the maintenance.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 supports configuring the key items and recording the key events ofan NE, thus facilitating to find and rectify the improper operations. As a result, users canknow the key events that occur in the equipment during a certain period of time.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnelat different node sites to communicate with each other.
l The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarmsof each NE in a network. In addition, the T2000 supports querying and setting the statusof reporting NE alarms.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipmentbecomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotelymaintain the OptiX OSN 9500 system.
l The T2000 can be used to upgrade the board software and NE software in the running state.
l The OptiX OSN 9500 provides the daylight saving time function. Users can change thetime system according to the season.
11 OAMOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
11-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
11.2 Network ManagementThis topic describes the network management system used by the OptiX OSN 9500.
The OptiX OSN 9500 is uniformly managed by the iManager network management system(hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDMequipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adoptsa standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology.The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module,to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 11 OAM
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11-3
12 Security Management
About This Chapter
The T2000 performs the security management over the OptiX OSN 9500 NE through severalmethods.
12.1 Authentication ManagementFor security reasons, only an authorized user can log in to the NE after authentication.
12.2 Authorization ManagementProper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operationsperformed by each user and the security of the NE system.
12.3 Network Security ManagementSafe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectivelymanage the NEs.
12.4 System Security ManagementFor the security reasons, the system provides certain security policies, which must be executedforcibly.
12.5 Log ManagementThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the log management function.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 12 Security Management
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-1
12.1 Authentication ManagementFor security reasons, only an authorized user can log in to the NE after authentication.
l NE login management: A user can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a validuser name and a valid password.
l NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. Forthis reason, if multiple users intend to operate an NE simultaneously, they need to beswitched to ensure that the data is unique.
l Forcibly logging out the other users of the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneousconfiguration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to theNE, one user can forcibly log out the other users at a lower level from the NE.
l NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower thanthe level of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
l NE setting locking: A user can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to preventthe other users from operating the locked modules.
l Query the online NE users.
12.2 Authorization ManagementProper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operationsperformed by each user and the security of the NE system.
l NE user management:
– According to the operation authority, NE users are divided into five levels in anascending order: monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, anddebugging level.
– According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users,CMD NE users, and general NE users.
– Create NE users, assign authorities, and specify a user flag.
– Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, and changethe user flag.
– Delete NE users.
l NE user group management:
– According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided intoadministrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnelgroup, and maintenance personnel group.
– Modify the group to which a user belongs.
12.3 Network Security ManagementSafe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectivelymanage the NEs.
l The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol.Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
12 Security ManagementOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
12-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
l Set the access control list (ACL) rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data trafficin the network, and to prevent malicious attack. According to the system security level, theACL rules are classified into the basic ACL rule and the advanced ACL rule.– For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule to check
the source address of the IP packets.– For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In
this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, andprotocol type of the received IP packets.
– If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advancedACL rule to check the packets.
– Query the ACL rule.
– Modify the ACL rule.
– Delete the ACL rule.
l An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:– Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to access it over
the Ethernet network.– Access through the serial interface.
– Access through the OAM port.
– Access through the COM port. Considering the security, after an NE is initialized ordownloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM accessfunction can be enabled when necessary.
l Control the access to NEs by using the T2000 LCT: If the T2000 LCT needs to be used tomanage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the T2000.
l When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user names andpasswords) is encrypted.
12.4 System Security ManagementFor the security reasons, the system provides certain security policies, which must be executedforcibly.l Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
l Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarmafter a user logs in to the NE.
l Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.
l Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.
l Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.
l Query or set the password uniqueness.
12.5 Log ManagementThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the log management function.
12.5.1 NE Security Log ManagementThe NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operationresults. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 12 Security Management
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-3
12.5.2 Syslog ManagementThe system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. Forunified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the logserver in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
12.5.1 NE Security Log ManagementThe NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operationresults. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.l Query the security logs of the NE.
l Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
12.5.2 Syslog ManagementThe system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. Forunified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the logserver in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the following:
l Enabling and disabling of the Syslog protocol
l Setting of the Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP
l Addition and deletion of Syslog servers
l Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at thesame time
l Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server andthe NE
Figure 12-1 shows how the data is transmitted through the Syslog protocol on a network. Toensure the security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are availablein a network. Normally, the IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and thesystem log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods,for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
Figure 12-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NMS
Syslog Server A
Syslog Server Breal timesecurity log
TCP/IP
NE A(client)
NE B
NE C(client)
NE D
ECC/ IP OVER DCC
12 Security ManagementOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
12-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
NOTE
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of allNEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system logserver. In Figure 12-1, NE A and NE C are data forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicatewith the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, it is necessary to configure theIP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to thetwo Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of the IP protocol. No forwardinggateway NE is required.
When the ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directlyconnect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must betransmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC.Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwardinggateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NEfor NE D.
For the detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 9500 ConfigurationGuide.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 12 Security Management
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12-5
13 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
This chapter describes various technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 9500.
13.1 Interface TypeThis topic describes all the interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
13.2 Optical Interface PerformanceThis topic describes the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of classification andparameters.
13.3 Electrical Interface PerformanceThis topic describes the electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of types andparameters.
13.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThis topic describes the clock interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of types, timing andsynchronization performance.
13.5 Auxiliary InterfaceThis topic describes the auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of types andparameters.
13.6 Power InterfaceThis topic describes the power interfaces related to the cabinet, subrack and HUB of the OptiXOSN 9500 cabinet.
13.7 Alarm InterfaceThis topic describes the alarm interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
13.8 Protection PerformanceThe protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
13.9 Transmission PerformanceThe transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
13.10 Power Supply SpecificationsThis topic describes the parameters adopted by the power supply of the OptiX OSN 9500.
13.11 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-1
This topic describes the boards of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of the name, power consumptionand weight.
13.12 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThis topic describes international electromagnetic compatibility standards that the OptiX OSN9500 complies with.
13.13 Safety StandardsThis topic describes safety standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with.
13.14 Environmental SpecificationThe equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
13.15 Environment RequirementThis topic describes the environment requirements of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of storage,transportation and operation.
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
13.1 Interface TypeThis topic describes all the interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-1 lists the different types of interfaces for the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment.
Table 13-1 Interface type
Interface Type Rate and Feature
Optical interface STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, GE, 10GE
Electricalinterface
STM-1, 1000BASE-T
Timing interface 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz
AuxiliaryInterface
Administration interface, orderwire phone interface and data interface
Power interface Cabinet power input interface, subrack power input interface and hubpower output interfac
Alarm interface Alarm input interface, alarm output interface, alarm concatenationinterface and cabinet alarm indicator driving interface
13.2 Optical Interface PerformanceThis topic describes the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of classification andparameters.
13.2.1 Classification of Optical InterfacesThe optical interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 9500 comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-TG.691. In addition, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides the STM-64 colored optical interface, 100Gbit/s EA, and STM-16 colored optical interfaces, 170 and 640a. The lasers comply with ITU-T G.958 in safety. The fiber connectors are of the LC or PC type.
13.2.2 Specifications of Optical InterfacesThis topic describes the specifications of different types of optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN9500.
13.2.3 Frequency Deviation Tolerance at the Input Optical InterfaceThe frequency stability of the oscillator inside the regenerator, in the free-run mode, should bebetter than ±20 x 10-6. The downstream SDH equipment, whose input interface receives suchsignals, should be able to normally work.
13.2.4 AIS Rate Deviation Tolerance at the Output Optical InterfaceThis topic describes the allowed AIS rate deviation tolerance at the output optical interfaces ofthe OptiX OSN 9500.
13.2.5 Laser ClassThe laser class of the OptiX OSN 9500 includes Class 1 and Class 1M.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-3
13.2.1 Classification of Optical InterfacesThe optical interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 9500 comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-TG.691. In addition, the OptiX OSN 9500 provides the STM-64 colored optical interface, 100Gbit/s EA, and STM-16 colored optical interfaces, 170 and 640a. The lasers comply with ITU-T G.958 in safety. The fiber connectors are of the LC or PC type.
CAUTIONThe optical interfaces of the same rate but on different boards may be of different types. Fordetails, refer to the OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System HardwareDescription.
The launched optical power and receiver sensitivity determine the probable transmissiondistance. The OptiX OSN 9500 supports the optical interfaces listed in Table 13-2.
Table 13-2 Types of optical interfaces
Application
Intra-OfficeCommunication
Inter-Office Communication
ShortDistance
LongDistance
Extremely LongDistance
Very LongDistance
Nominalwavelengthof theopticalsource (nm)
1310 1550
1310
1550
1310
1550 1550.12 1550
Fiber type Multiplemode
G.652
G.652
G.652
G.652
G.652
G.652 G.652 G.652
STMlevel
STM-1
- - - S-1.1
- L-1.1
- - -
STM-4
- - - S-4.1
- L-4.1
- - -
STM-16
- I-16
- S-16.1
- L-16.1
L-16.2/L-16.2(je)
V-16.2(je)
U-16.2(je)/coloredopticalinterface(170)/coloredopticalinterface(640.a)
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Application
Intra-OfficeCommunication
Inter-Office Communication
ShortDistance
LongDistance
Extremely LongDistance
Very LongDistance
STM-64
- - I-64.1
- S-64.2b
- L-64.2b/Le-64.2/Ls-64.2
V-64.2b Ue-64.2c/Ue-64.2d/100 Gbit/sEA
Note: Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, L-16.2(je), V-16.2(je) and U-16.2(je) areinternal standards of Huawei.
13.2.2 Specifications of Optical InterfacesThis topic describes the specifications of different types of optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN9500.
Table 13-3, Table 13-4, Table 13-5 and Table 13-6 list the specifications of different types ofoptical interfaces. The OptiX OSN 9500 provides optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.691.
The mean launched optical power is the mean power measured at reference point S for thepseudo-random data series that are coupled by the transmitter to fibers.
The extinction ratio (EX) is the ratio of the mean optical power (with signals transmitted) to themean optical power (without signals transmitted) in the case of the poorest reflection and fullmodulation.
The receiver sensitivity is the minimum mean optical power measured at reference point R,where the specified bit error rate is reached (BER = 1 x 10–10 for STM-16, STM-4 and STM-1;BER = 1 x 10–12 for STM-64).
The receiver overload is the maximum mean optical power measured at reference point R, wherethe specified bit error rate is reached (BER = 1 x 10–10 for STM-16, STM-4 and STM-1; BER= 1 x 10–12 for STM-64).
Table 13-3 Specifications of STM-1 optical interfaces
Item Unit Specification
Nominal bit rate kbit/s 155520
Classification code - S-1.1 L-1.1
Operating wavelength range nm 1261–1360 1263–1360
Transmission distance km 15 40
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-5
Item Unit Specification
Features of thetransmitter atreference point S
Fiber Type - Single-modeLC
Single-modeLC
Maximum spectrum width of–20 dB
nm NAa 1
Minimum side modesuppression ratio
dB NAa 30
Maximum mean launchedoptical power
dBm –8 0
Minimum mean launchedoptical power
dBm –15 –5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10
Features ofoptical channelsat reference pointSR
Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–28
Maximum dispersion ps/nm
96 246 NAa
Features of thereceiver atreference point R
Minimum sensitivity dBm –28 –34
Minimum overload point dBm –8 –10
Maximum optical pathpenalty
dB 1 1
a: NA indicates not applicable.
Table 13-4 Specifications of STM-4 optical interfaces
Item Unit Specification
Nominal bit rate kbit/s 622080
Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1
Operating wavelength range nm 1274–1356 1280–1335
Transmission distance km 15 40
Features of thetransmitter atreference point S
Fiber Type Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Maximum spectrum widthof –20 dB
nm NAa 1
Minimum side modesuppression ratio
dB NAa 30
Maximum mean launchedoptical power
dBm –8 2
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Item Unit Specification
Minimum mean launchedoptical power
dBm –15 –3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10
Features of opticalchannels atreference points Rand S
Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–24
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 74 NAa
Features of thereceiver atreference point R
Minimum sensitivity dBm –28 –28
Minimum overload point dBm –8 –8
Maximum optical pathpenalty
dB 1 1
a: NA indicates not applicable.
Table 13-5 Specifications of STM-16 optical interfaces
Item Unit
Specification
Nominal bit rate kbit/s
2488320
Classification code – I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
L-16.2(je)
V-16.2(je)
U-16.2(je)
Operating wavelength range nm
1266–1360
1260–1360
1280–1335
1500–1580
1530–1560
1530–1565
1550.12
Transmission distance km
2 15 40 80 100 140 170
Featuresof thetransmitter atreferencepoint S
Fiber Type - Single-modeLC
Single-modeLC
Single-modeLC
Single-modeLC
Single-modeLC
Single-mode LC
SLM
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-7
Item Unit
Specification
Maximumspectrum widthof –20 dB
nm
NAa
1 1 <1 <0.6 <0.6 <0.6
Minimum sidemodesuppressionratio
dB
NAa
30 30 30 30 30b 30b
Maximum meanlaunched opticalpower
dBm
–3 0 3 3 7 15 (BA)3(opticalmodule)
18 (BA)3 (opticalmodule)
Minimum meanlaunched opticalpower
dBm
–10
–5 –2 –2 5 13 (BA)–2(opticalmodule)
15 (BA)–2(opticalmodule)
Minimumextinction ratio
dB
8.2
8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Featuresof opticalchannelsatreferencepoints Rand S
Attenuationrange
dB
0–7
0–12
12–24
12–24
16–28
25–39 36–47
Maximumdispersion
ps/nm
12 NAa
NAa
1200–1600
2000 2800 3400
Featuresof thereceiveratreferencepoint R
Minimumsensitivity
dBm
–18
–18 –27 –28 –28 –28 –32 (PA)28(opticalmodule)
Minimumoverload point
dBm
–3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9 –10 (PA)–9(opticalmodule)
Maximumoptical pathpenalty
dB
1 1 1 2 2 2 2
a: NA indicates not applicable.b: These specifications need to be stipulated in international standards.
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 13-6 Specifications of STM-64 optical interfaces
Item Unit
Specification
Nominal bit rate kbit/s
9953280
Classification code - I-64.1 S-64.2b
Le-64.2
Ls-64.2
L-64.2b
V-64.2b
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Operatingwavelength range
nm
1290–1330
1530–1565
1530–1565
1530–1565
1530–1565
1550.12
1550.12
1550.12
Transmissiondistance
km
2 40 60 80 80 120 163 174
Features of thetransmitter atreference pointS
Maximumspectrumwidth of –20 dB
nm
1 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Minimumside modesuppression ratio
dB
30 30 30 30 30 30 35 35
Maximum meanlaunchedopticalpower
dBm
–1 2 4 7 15(BA)2(opticalmodule)
15(BA)–1(opticalmodule)
15(BA)–1(opticalmodule)
18 (BA)–1(opticalmodule)
Minimummeanlaunchedopticalpower
dBm
–6 –1 2 3 13(BA)–4(opticalmodule)
13(BA)–4(opticalmodule)
13(BA)–4(opticalmodule)
15 (BA)–4(opticalmodule)
Minimumextinctionratio
dB
6 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 10 10
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-9
Item Unit
Specification
Features of theopticalpath atMPI-SandMPI-Rpoints
Attenuation range
dB
0–4 3–11
12–22
14–23
15–26
22–37 NAa NAa
Maximumchromaticdispersion
ps/nm
6.6 800
1200
1600
1600 680 +1360(DCU)b
800 800
Features of thereceiver atreference pointR
Minimumsensitivity
dBm
–11 –14
–21 –21 –14 –26(PA)
–14(opticalmodule)
–26(PA)–16(opticalmodule)c
–26 (PA)–16(opticalmodule)c
Minimumoverloadpoint
dBm
–1 –1 –8 –8 –1 –10(PA)–1(opticalmodule)
–10(PA)–1(opticalmodule)
–10 (PA)–1(opticalmodule)
Maximum opticalpathpenalty
dB
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
a: NA indicates not applicable.b: The dispersion coefficient for the G.652 fiber at 1550 nm is 17 ps/nm.km. Hence, whenthe transmission distance is 120 km, the dispersion tolerance is 2040 ps/nm.c: The sensitivity is the poorest sensitivity for back-to-back equipment when the FEC functionis enabled.
Table 13-7 Wavelengths for STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces
No. Frequency(THz)
Wavelength(nm)
No. Frequency(THz)
Wavelength(nm)
1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53
2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73
3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94
4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
No. Frequency(THz)
Wavelength(nm)
No. Frequency(THz)
Wavelength(nm)
5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35
6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56
7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77
8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98
9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19
10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40
11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61
12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82
13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04
14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25
15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47
16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68
17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90
18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12
19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33
20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55
Table 13-8 Specifications of STM-16 and STM-64 colored optical interfaces
Item Unit Specification
Transmission rate – STM-16 STM-64
Classification code – 170 640.a 100 Gbit/sEA
Operating frequency range THz 192.1–196.0 192.1–196.0
192.1–196.0
Features of thetransmitter atreference pointS
Maximumspectrum widthof –20 dB
nm 0.4 0.2 0.3
Minimum sidemodesuppressionratio
dB 30 35 30
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-11
Item Unit Specification
Maximummean launchedoptical power
dBm 3 –1 –1
Minimum meanlaunchedoptical power
dBm –2 –5 –4
Minimumextinction ratio
dB 8.2 10 10
Maximumdispersion
ps/nm 3400 10880 800
Features of thereceiver atreference pointR
Minimumsensitivity
dBm –28 –28 –14
Minimumoverload point
dBm –9 –9 –1
Maximumoptical pathpenalty
dB 2 2 2
Back-to-backsignal-to-noiseratio tolerance(without FEC)
dB 21a 21a 26b
Back-to-backoptical signal-to-noise ratiotolerance(outband FEC)
dB Notsupported
Notsupported
20c
a: The overall dispersion is less than the maximum dispersion tolerance. The input opticalpower ranges from –18 dBm to –22 dBm. BER = 1 x 10–12
b: The residual dispersion is from –800 ps/nm to +800 ps/nm. The input optical power rangesfrom –8 dBm to –12 dBm. BER = 1 x 10–12.
c: The residual dispersion ranges from –800 ps/nm to +800 ps/nm. The input optical powerranges from –8 dBm to –12 dBm. BER = 2 x 10–4 (without FEC)
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 13-9 Specifications of GE and 10xGE optical interfaces
Interface type
TargettransmissionDistance(km)
FiberType
LaunchedOpticalPower(dBm)
CenterWavelength (nm)
OverloadOpticalPower(dBm)
ReceiverSensitivity(dBm)
Extinction Ratio(dB)
1000Base-SX
0.55 Multi-modeLC
–9.5 to –2.5
770–860 0 –17 9
1000Base-LX
10 Single-modeLC
–9.5 to –3
1270–1355
–3 –20 9
40 Single-modeLC
–4.5 to –3
1270–1355
–3 –22.5 9
1000Base-EX
80 Single-modeLC
–2 to +5 1540–1570
–3 –23 9
1000Base-ZX
80 Single-modeLC
–2 to +5 1540–1570
–3 –23 9
10GBbase-LR
10 Single-modeLC
–6 to –1 1310 0.5 –11 6
10GBase-ER
40 Single-modeLC
–1 to +2 1550 –1 –15 8.2
13.2.3 Frequency Deviation Tolerance at the Input Optical InterfaceThe frequency stability of the oscillator inside the regenerator, in the free-run mode, should bebetter than ±20 x 10-6. The downstream SDH equipment, whose input interface receives suchsignals, should be able to normally work.
For the OptiX OSN 9500, the allowed frequency deviation of optical input interfaces complieswith related standards. Table 13-10 lists the details.
Table 13-10 Frequency deviation tolerance at the input interface
Optical Interface Level Required Specification (ppm)
STM-1 ±20
STM-4 ±20
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-13
Optical Interface Level Required Specification (ppm)
STM-16 ±20
STM-64 ±20
13.2.4 AIS Rate Deviation Tolerance at the Output Optical InterfaceThis topic describes the allowed AIS rate deviation tolerance at the output optical interfaces ofthe OptiX OSN 9500.
When the input interface loses signals, the SDH equipment sends the AIS rate deviation toleranceto the downstream through the output interface. For the OptiX OSN 9500, the allowed AIS ratedeviation of output optical interfaces complies with related standards. Table 13-11 lists thedetails.
Table 13-11 AIS rate deviation tolerance at the output optical interface
Optical Interface Level Required Specification (ppm)
STM-1 ±20
STM-4 ±20
STM-16 ±20
STM-64 ±20
13.2.5 Laser ClassThe laser class of the OptiX OSN 9500 includes Class 1 and Class 1M.
Table 13-12 lists the laser class of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-12 Laser class
Laser Class Board
Class 1 D64E/D64D, L64E/JL64, F64E/F64D, O16E/O16D, Q16E/JQ16, D16E/JD16, L16E/JL16, L16L/L16V, JLQ4, JH41, JLH1, EGT6/EGT6A, GE06,EGTH, EGS8, and EAS1
Class 1M JBA2, JBPA, and JDCU
13.3 Electrical Interface PerformanceThis topic describes the electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of types andparameters.
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
The OptiX OSN 9500 provides electrical interfaces of the SMB type, whose rate is 155520 kbit/s and whose line code type is CMI. The OptiX OSN 9500 also provides electrical interfaces ofthe 1000BASE-T type.
13.3.1 Signal Rate Deviation Tolerance at the Output InterfaceThe signal rate deviation tolerance at the output interface indicates the deviation between theoutput signal rate and nominal rate. The output signal rate is measured when the AIS is output.
13.3.2 Attenuation Tolerance at the Input InterfaceThis topic describes the attenuation specifications of the SMB input interfaces and 1000BASE-T input interface of the OptiX OSN 9500.
13.3.3 Frequency Deviation Tolerance at the Input InterfaceThe frequency deviation tolerance is the allowed maximum input signal rate deviation at theinput interface.
13.3.1 Signal Rate Deviation Tolerance at the Output InterfaceThe signal rate deviation tolerance at the output interface indicates the deviation between theoutput signal rate and nominal rate. The output signal rate is measured when the AIS is output.
Table 13-13 lists the specifications of the signal rate deviation tolerance at the output electricalinterfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-13 Signal rate deviation tolerance at the SMB output interface
Interface Type Required Specification (ppm)
155520 kbit/s ±20
Table 13-14 Signal rate deviation tolerance at the 1000BASE-T output interface
Interface Typ Required Specification (MHz)
1000BASE-T 125.00 MHz±0.01%
13.3.2 Attenuation Tolerance at the Input InterfaceThis topic describes the attenuation specifications of the SMB input interfaces and 1000BASE-T input interface of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Cables (compliant with the f attenuation rule) that connect the equipment have certainattenuation. The attenuated signals should still be correctly received at the input interface of theequipment. Table 13-15 and Table 13-16 list the attenuation specifications of the input electricalinterfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-15
Table 13-15 Attenuation tolerance at the SMB input interface
Interface Type Required Specification (dB)
155520 kbit/s 0–12.7
Table 13-16 Attenuation tolerance at the 1000BASE-T input interface
Interface Type Required Specification
1000BASE-T In the case of 10-10 bit error rate, use thetwisted pairs of category 5 to transmit thesignals for 100 meters.
13.3.3 Frequency Deviation Tolerance at the Input InterfaceThe frequency deviation tolerance is the allowed maximum input signal rate deviation at theinput interface.
Table 13-17 and Table 13-18 list the specifications of the frequency deviation tolerance of theinput electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-17 Frequency deviation tolerance at the SMB input interface
Interface Type Required Specification (ppm)
155520 kbit/s ±20
Table 13-18 Frequency deviation tolerance at the 1000BASE-T input interface
Interface Type Required Specification (MHz)
1000BASE-T 125.00 MHz±0.01%
13.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThis topic describes the clock interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of types, timing andsynchronization performance.
13.4.1 Clock Interface TypeThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the clock input interface and clock output interface.
13.4.2 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
13.4.1 Clock Interface TypeThe OptiX OSN 9500 provides the clock input interface and clock output interface.
Table 13-19 lists the clock interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-19 Clock features of the OptiX OSN 9500
External SynchronizationSource
Two clock inputs, 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703),75 ohms
Synchronization Output Two clock outputs, 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703), 75 ohms
13.4.2 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
Table 13-20 lists the timing and synchronization performance.
Table 13-20 Timing and synchronization performance
Performance Description
Output Jitter ITU-T G.813 compliant
Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode ITU-T G.813 compliant
13.5 Auxiliary InterfaceThis topic describes the auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of types andparameters.
Table 13-21 lists the auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-21 Auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500
Interface Type Description
Administrationinterface
Ethernet, RS-232, F&f interface
Orderwire phoneInterface
One two-core orderwire phone interface and two orderwire phone NNIinterfaces
Data interface One 64 kbit/s codirectional data interface and four RS-422/RS-232optional serial interfaces
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-17
Orderwire Phone InterfaceTable 13-22 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces.
Table 13-22 Specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces
Item Specification
Voice channel interface
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz–3400 Hz
Current 18 mA
Input gain –4/0/0 dB
Output gain 0/–7/0 dB
Signaling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23
Simulated orderwire extension
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz–3400 Hz
Transmit electrical level –3.5 dBr ±1 dBr
Receive electrical level –3.5 dBr ± 1 dBr
64 kbit/s Codirectional Data InterfaceThe 64 kbit/s codirectional data interface is the F1 interface on the JEOW. Table 13-23 lists thespecifications of the 64 kbit/s codirectional data interface.
Table 13-23 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s codirectional data interface
Item Specification
Bit rate 64 kbit/s
Timing signal From RX
Coding scheme ITU-U G.703
Output pulse wave form ITU-U G.703
Output interface feature ITU-U G.703
Input interface feature ITU-U G.703
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
RS-232 Serial Interface
The RS-232 serial interfaces are Serial 1–Serial 4 interfaces on the JEOW. Table 13-24 lists thespecifications.
Table 13-24 Specifications of RS-232 serial interfaces
Item Specification
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±5 V to ±15 V
RS-422 Serial Interface
The RS-422 serial interfaces are Serial 1–Serial 4 interfaces on the JEOW. Table 13-25 lists thespecifications.
Table 13-25 Specifications of RS-422 interfaces
Item Specification
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±2.0 V
13.6 Power InterfaceThis topic describes the power interfaces related to the cabinet, subrack and HUB of the OptiXOSN 9500 cabinet.
Cabinet Power Input Interface
The DC PDU provides two stand-alone channels of power supplies for the cabinet through thecabinet power input interface.
Subrack Power Input Interface
The JPIU provides the power input interface for the subrack power and also provides 1+1 hotbackup protection.
Hub Power Supply Output Interface
The JPIU provides the hub power supplies.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-19
13.7 Alarm InterfaceThis topic describes the alarm interfaces of the OptiX OSN 9500.
The EMPU provides the alarm input interface, alarm output interface, alarm concatenationinterface and cabinet alarm indicator driving interface for the OptiX OSN 9500.
13.8 Protection PerformanceThe protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
Linear MSPTable 13-26 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 13-26 Linear MSP parameters
ProtectionType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingProtocol
SwitchingTime
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition
1+1 single-endedswitching
Non-revertive
Notrequired
≤ 50 ms - Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOSl R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SD
(optional)l Forced
switchingl Manual
switchingl Exercise
switching
1+1 single-endedswitching
Revertive Notrequired
≤ 50 ms 600s
1+1 dual-endedswitching
Non-revertive
APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms -
1+1 dual-endedswitching
Revertive APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
1:N dual-endedswitching
Revertive APSprotocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
MSP RingTable 13-27 lists the MSP ring parameters.
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 13-27 MSP ring parameters
ProtectionType
RevertiveMode
SwitchingMode
Switching Time
DefaultWTRTime
SwitchingCondition
Two-fiberbidirectionalMSP
Revertive l Forcedswitching
l Manualswitching
l Exerciseswitching
≤ 50 ms 600s Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOSl R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SDl Forced
switchingl Manual
switchingl Exercise
switching
Two-fiberunidirectional MSP
Revertive l Forcedswitching
l Manualswitching
l Exerciseswitching
≤ 50 ms 600s
Four-fiberbidirectionalMSP
Revertive l Forcedswitching -ring
l Manualswitching -ring
l Exerciseswitching -ring
l Forcedswitching -span
l Manualswitching -span
l Exerciseswitching -span
≤ 50 ms 600s
SNCPTable 13-28 lists the SNCP parameters.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-21
Table 13-28 SNCP parameters
Protection Type
RevertiveMode
SwitchingTime
DefaultWTR Time
Switching Conditions
SNCP Revertive ≤50 ms 600s Any of the following alarms triggersthe switching of VC4 level SNCP:l R_LOFl R_LOCl MS_AISl B2_EXCl AU_AISl AU_LOPl B3_EXC (Optional)l B3_SD (Optional)l HP_UNEQ (Optional)l HP_TIM (Optional)Any of the following alarms triggersthe switching of VC3 level SNCP:l TU_LOPl TU_AISl B3_EXC (Optional)l B3_SD (Optional)Any of the following alarms triggersthe switching of VC12 level SNCP:l TU_LOPl TU_AISl BIP_EXC (Optional)l BIP_SD (Optional)
Non-revertive
≤50 ms -
13.9 Transmission PerformanceThe transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 13-29 lists the transmission performance.
Table 13-29 Transmission performance
Performance Description
Jitter at STM-N Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825
Jitter at PDH Interface Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783
Bit Error Compliant with ITU-T G.826
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
13.10 Power Supply SpecificationsThis topic describes the parameters adopted by the power supply of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-30 lists the specifications of the power supply for the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-30 Power supply specifications
Item Specification
Power supply mode DC power supply
Nominal voltage –48 V or –60 V
Voltage range –38.4 V to –57.6 V or –48 V to –72 V
Max. power consumption 2500 W
Max. current 63 A
13.11 Power Consumption and Weight of BoardsThis topic describes the boards of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of the name, power consumptionand weight.
Table 13-31 lists details on power consumption and weight of boards (difference < 10%).
Table 13-31 Power consumption and weight of boards
Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg)
D64E 33 0.95
D64D 60 1
L64E 20 1
JL64 41 1
F64E 26 1.04
F64D 49 1.1
O16E 44 1.1
O16D 64 1.2
Q16E 24 1
JQ16 40 1
D16E 23 0.9
JD16 35 1
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-23
Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg)
L16E 22 0.9
JL16 32 1
L16L 20 0.9
L16V 49 1
JH41 61 1
JLQ4 48 1
JLH1 60 1
JLHE 45 1
EGT6 78 1.9
EGT6A 78 1.9
GE06 70 1.9
EGTH 78 1.9
EGS8 70 1.0
EAS1 81 1.0
GXCH 85 1.5
EXCH 52 1.5
GXCL 36.5 1
EXCL 78 1.85
JSCC 35 0.9
ESCC 48 0.9
JSTG 24 0.7
JSTI 0 0.5
JEOW 20 0.8
JCOM 35 0.9
JPIU 15 3.5
EMPU 10 0.9
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg)
JPBU l When the system is normal, the JPBU consumes lesspower, which can be neglected..
l When the JPBU and EMPU jointly supply power forthe MBUS of the system, the JPBU consumes 70 Wpower.
l When the power protection is started, the JPBU canprovide power protection for one board. In this case,the maximum power consumption of the JPBU is250 W.
0.9
JDCU 0 0.5
JBPA 20 1.1
JBA2 20 1.1
13.12 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThis topic describes international electromagnetic compatibility standards that the OptiX OSN9500 complies with.
The OptiX OSN 9500 is designed on the basis of the communication center equipment complaintwith the international electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) standards. According to thedevelopment of the EMC, Huawei specifies the EMC specifications for the international marketof the product. Hence, the EMS specifications of the OptiX OSN 9500 show stricter EMC thanother products. These EMS specifications are in accordance with international standards. Table13-32 lists the related EMC standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with.
Table 13-32 International EMC standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with
Standard Description
EN 300 386 V1.3.3 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM);Telecommunication network equipment; ElectroMagneticcompatibility (EMC) requirements.
EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbancecharacteristics of information technology equipment.
EN 55024 Information technology equipment-Immunity characteristics-Limitsand methods of measurement.
EN 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 2: Electrostatic dischargeimmunity test.
EN 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency,electromagnetic field immunity test.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-25
Standard Description
EN 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burstimmunity test.
EN 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 5: Surge immunity test.
EN 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 6: Immunity to conducteddisturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields.
EN 61000-4-29 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part4-29: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions andvoltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests.
ETSI EN 300 132-2 Power supply interface at the input totelecommunicationsequipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc).
ETSI ES 201 468V1.3.1
Elecromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);Additional ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC)telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of servicein specific applications.
13.13 Safety StandardsThis topic describes safety standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with.
Table 13-33 lists the safety standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with.
Table 13-33 Safety standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with
Item Standard
EMC CISPR22 Class ACISPR24EN55022 Class AEN50024ETSI EN 300 386 Class AETSI ES 201 468AS/NZS CISPR22 Class AGB9254 Class AVCCI Class ACNS 13438 Class A
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Item Standard
Safety IEC 60950-1EN 60950-1UL 60950-1CSA C22.2 No 60950-1AS/NZS 60950-1BS EN 60950-1IS 13252ITU-T K.20ITU-T K.44GB4943
Laser safety FDA rules, 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2, EN60825-1, EN60825-2GB7247
Health ICNIRP Guideline1999-519-ECEN 50385OET Bulletin 65IEEE Std C95.1EN 60215
Environmentprotection
RoHS
Grounding ITU-T K.27ETSI EN 300 253
13.14 Environmental SpecificationThe equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table13-34.
Table 13-34 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Specifications Description
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0 ℃ to 45 ℃
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-27
Specifications Description
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismicperformance
Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
13.15 Environment RequirementThis topic describes the environment requirements of the OptiX OSN 9500, in terms of storage,transportation and operation.
The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the environmentrequirements.
l ETS 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 partly temperature-controlled locations
l NEBS GR-63-CORE: network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: physicalprotection
13.15.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX OSN 9500 has certain requirements for the storage environment.
13.15.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX OSN 9500 has certain requirements for transportation.
13.15.3 Environment for OperationThe OptiX OSN 9500 different requirements for operation.
13.15.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX OSN 9500 has certain requirements for the storage environment.
Climate
Table 13-35 lists the climate requirements for storage of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-35 Climate requirements for storage
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40℃ to +70℃
Temperature change rate ≤ 1 ℃/min
Relative Humidity 5%–100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Item Range
Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof RequirementThe customer equipment on site should be stored indoors.
No water should remain on the floor or leak to the equipment carton. The equipment should beplaced away from places where water leakage is possible, such as near the auto fire-fightingfacilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, the following four conditions are required.
l The carton must be intact.
l Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton.
l No water is on the ground where the carton is placed.
l The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunshine.
Biological Environmentl Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.
l Keep rodents such as mice away.
Air CleannessThe air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust.
The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements specified inTable 13-36.
Table 13-36 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage
Mechanical Active Substance Density
Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Preciptitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table13-37.
Table 13-37 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage
Chemical Active Substance Density
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-29
Chemical Active Substance Density
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCL ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 13-38 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 13-38 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage
Item Sub-Item Range
Randomvibration
Accelerationspectral density
- 0.02m2/s3 -
Frequency range 5 Hz–10 Hz 10 Hz–50 Hz 50 Hz–100 Hz
dB/oct +12 - –12
13.15.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX OSN 9500 has certain requirements for transportation.
Climate
Table 13-39 lists the climate requirements for transportation of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-39 Climate requirements for transportation
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40℃ to +70℃
Temperature change rate ≤ 1℃/min
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Item Range
Relative humidity 5%–100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s²
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s²
Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
The following conditions are required for the transportation of the OptiX OSN 9500.
l The carton must be intact.
l Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton.
l No water remains in the transportation tool.
Biological Environmentl Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.
l Keep rodents such as mice away.
Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive
dust.
l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements definedby Table 13-40.
Table 13-40 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspending dust No requirement
Preciptitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m²·h
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m³
l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined byTable 13-41.
Table 13-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 1.0 mg/m³
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-31
Chemical Active Substance Content
H2S ≤ 0.5 mg/m³
NOX ≤ 1.0 mg/m³
NH3 ≤ 3.0 mg/m³
Cl2 None
HCL ≤ 0.5 mg/m³
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m³
O3 ≤ 0.1 mg/m³
Mechanical StressTable 13-42 lists the requirements for transportation of the OptiX OSN 9500 equipment.
Table 13-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation
Item Sub-Item Range
Random vibration Acceleration spectraldensity
1 m2/s3 –3 dBA
Frequency range 5 Hz–20 Hz 20 Hz–200 Hz
Collision Response spectrum I(sample weight: > 50 kg)
100 m/s, 11 ms, 100 times for each side
Response spectrum II(sample weight: ≤ 50 kg)
180 m/s², 6 ms, 100 times for each side
Drop Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 10 1.0
< 15 1.0
< 20 0.8
< 30 0.6
< 40 0.5
< 50 0.4
< 100 0.3
> 100 0.1
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Item Sub-Item Range
Note:Shocking response spectrum indicates the response curve of the maximum accelerationstimulated by specified shock.Static load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with package can endure whenthe equipment is piled up in a specific manner.
13.15.3 Environment for OperationThe OptiX OSN 9500 different requirements for operation.
ClimateTable 13-43 lists the temperature and humidity requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN9500.
Table 13-43 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Equipment Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-TermOperation
Short-TermOperation
Long-TermOperation
Short-TermOperation
OptiX OSN 9500 0℃–45℃ –5℃–55℃ 10%–90% 5%–95%
NOTEDescription
The temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front ofthe equipment.
Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours,and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 13-44 lists other climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN 9500.
Table 13-44 Other climate requirements
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa–106 kPa
Temperature change rate ≤ 30℃/h
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s²
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s²
Air flowing speed ≤ 5 m/s
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-33
Biological Environmentl Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.
l Keep rodents such as mice away.
Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive
dust.
l The density of the mechanically active substances complies with the requirements definedby Table 13-45.
Table 13-45 Density requirements for mechanically active substances during operation
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particle/m³
Suspending dust ≤ 0.2 mg/m³
Preciptitable dust ≤ 1.5 mg/m²·h
Gravel ≤ 20 mg/m³
l The density of the chemically active substances complies with the requirements defined byTable 13-46.
Table 13-46 Density requirements for chemically active substances during operation
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.3 mg/m³
H2S ≤ 0.1 mg/m³
NH3 ≤ 1.0 mg/m³
Cl2 ≤ 0.1 mg/m³
HCL ≤ 0.1 mg/m³
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m³
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m³
NOX ≤ 0.5 mg/m³
Mechanical Stress
Table 13-47 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation of the OptiX OSN 9500.
13 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
13-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Table 13-47 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Item Sub-Item Range
Sinusoidal vibration Velocity 5 mm/s -
Acceleration - 2 m/s2
Frequency range 5 Hz–62 Hz 62 Hz–200 Hz
Non-steady shock Shocking responsespectrum II
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, thrice foreach side
Static load 0
Note:Shocking response spectrum indicates the response curve of the maximum accelerationstimulated by specified shock.Static load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with package can endure whenthe equipment is piled up in a specific manner.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 13 Technical Specifications
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13-35
14 Compliance Standards
About This Chapter
This chapter lists the standards that the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with.
14.1 ITU-T Recommendations
14.2 IEEE Standards
14.3 IETF Standards
14.4 Environment Related Standards
14.5 EMC Related Standards
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 14 Compliance Standards
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-1
14.1 ITU-T RecommendationsStandard Description
G.691 Optical interfaces for single-channel STM-64 system and other SDHsystems with optical amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multi-channel systems with optical amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/Electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detectionand clearance criteria
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmissionsystems
G.774 1–5 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management information modelfor the network element view
G.781 Synchronization layer functions
G.783 Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipmentfunctional blocks
G.784 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the synchronous digitalhierarchy (SDH)
G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology andgeneric functionality
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are basedon the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy.
G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are basedon the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy.
G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are basedon the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH).
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constantbit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate.
14 Compliance StandardsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
14-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Standard Description
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on thesynchronous digital hierarchy (SDH).
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to thesynchronous digital hierarchy
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
M.3010 Principles for a telecommunications management network
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters ofoptical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.663 Application-related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.7710 Common equipment management function requirements
I.610 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
14.2 IEEE StandardsStandard Description
IEEE802.3 -2005
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) accessmethod and physical layer specification
14.3 IETF StandardsStandard Description
RFC2615(1999) Point-to-point protocol (PPP) over SONET/SDH
RFC1662(1994) PPP in HDLC-like framing
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 14 Compliance Standards
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-3
Standard Description
RFC1661(1994) The point-to-point protocol (PPP)
14.4 Environment Related StandardsStandard Description
EN 300 386 V1.3.3 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);Telecommunication network equipment; ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC) requirements
EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbancecharacteristics of information technology equipment
EN 55024 Information technology equipment-Immunity characteristics-Limitsand methods of measurement.
EN 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 2: Electrostatic dischargeimmunity test
EN 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency,Electromagnetic field immunity test
EN 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burstimmunity test
EN 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 5: Surge immunity test
EN 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Part 4: Testing andmeasurement techniques; Section 6: Immunity to conducteddisturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
EN 61000-4-29 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part4-29: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions andvoltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests.
ETSI EN 300 132-2 Power supply interface at the input to telecommunicationsequipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc).
ETSI ES 201 468V1.3.1
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);Additional Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of servicein specific applications.
ETSI EN 300 019-1 Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions andenvironmental tests for telecommunications equipment;Classification of environmental conditions
14 Compliance StandardsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
14-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Standard Description
ETSI EN 300 019-2 Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental conditions andenvironmental tests for telecommunications equipment;Specification of environmental tests
ETSI EN 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE); Acoustic noise emitted bytelecommunications equipment
IEC 60068-1 Environmental testing; Part 1: General and guidance
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures; Part 2: Tests
IEC 600721-1 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 1: Environmentalparameters and their severities
IEC 600721-2 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 2: Environmentalconditions appearing in nature
IEC 600529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
QM333 Specification for environmental testing of electronic equipments fortransmission and switching use (An Indian standard)
GR-63 NEBS Requirements: Physical Protection
GB/T 2423 Environmental testing for electric and electronic products
YD5083-99 Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances ofTelecommunications Equipment
14.5 EMC Related StandardsEMC RelatedStandards
Description
IEC 61000-4-2EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurementtechniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagneticfield immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4EN 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5EN 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6EN 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances,induced by radio-frequency fields
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 14 Compliance Standards
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14-5
EMC RelatedStandards
Description
IEC 61000-4-29EN 61000-4-29
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing andmeasurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltagevariations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN55022
Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN55024
Information technology equipment-immunity characteristics-Limitsand methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM);Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagneticcompatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM);Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunicationsequipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications equipment;Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
14 Compliance StandardsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
14-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
15 Basic Principles
About This Chapter
This topic describes the SDH principles, basic Ethernet technologies, and link aggregation andQinQ principles.
15.1 Introduction to SDHThis topic describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing structures,frame structures, and overhead bytes.
15.2 Introduction to EthernetThis topic describes the basic Ethernet principles and the frame structure.
15.3 Link AggregationThis topic describes the basic principles and frame structure of link aggregation.
15.4 QinQ PrincipleThis topic describes the basic principles and frame structure of the QinQ technology.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 15 Basic Principles
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-1
15.1 Introduction to SDHThis topic describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing structures,frame structures, and overhead bytes.
15.1.1 SDH LevelsThe first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be generated byinterleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N= 4, 16, 64).
15.1.2 Multiplexing StructureThe multiplexing structure of the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with the requirements specified inITU-T Recommendations.
15.1.3 Basic Frame StructureThe basic STM-N frame structure consists of RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and payload.
15.1.4 SOH DescriptionThe SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH, STM-4 SOH, STM-16 SOH, and STM-64 SOH.
15.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes DescriptionThe POH bytes include higher order path overhead bytes and lower order path overhead bytes.
15.1.1 SDH LevelsThe first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be generated byinterleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N= 4, 16, 64).
Table 15-1 lists the SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates.
Table 15-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates
SDH level Bit rate (kbit/s)
STM-1 155520
STM-4 622080
STM-16 2488320
STM-64 9953280
STM-64 (out-of-band FEC) 10664228
15.1.2 Multiplexing StructureThe multiplexing structure of the OptiX OSN 9500 complies with the requirements specified inITU-T Recommendations.
Figure 15-1 shows the multiplexing structure of the OptiX OSN series products.
15 Basic PrinciplesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
15-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 15-1 Multiplexing structure
STM-64
STM-16
STM-4
STM-1
AU-4-64c
AU-4-16c
AU-4-4c
AU-4AUG-1
VC-4-64c
VC-4-16c
VC-4-4c
VC-4
TUG-3
TUG-2
TU-12 VC-12 C-12
C4-64c
C4-16c
C4-4c
C-4
×3
×7
×3
×4
×16
×64
×4 ×16
×4
Pointerjustification
Multiplexing
Aligning
MappingTU-11 VC-11 C-11
AU-3 VC-3 C-3
×4
×3 TU-3 VC-3×1
15.1.3 Basic Frame StructureThe basic STM-N frame structure consists of RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and payload.
Figure 15-2 shows the STM-N frame structure.
Figure 15-2 STM-N frame structure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STM-N payload
Payload
RSOH
Multiplex section overhead
MSOH
9 rows
Transmission direction
270 X N columns (bytes)
9 X N columns (bytes) 261 X N columns (bytes)
Information code stream9 X 270 X N bytes
Frame cycle: 125 S
Regenerator section overhead
Administrative unit pointer (s) AU-PTR
Hig
h-or
der p
ath
over
head
PO
H
Frame n-1
T=125 S
Frame n Frame n+1
Scrambler: X7 + X 6 +1 mm
15.1.4 SOH DescriptionThe SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH, STM-4 SOH, STM-16 SOH, and STM-64 SOH.
STM-1 SOH
Figure 15-3 shows the structure of STM-1 SOH.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 15 Basic Principles
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-3
Figure 15-3 STM-1 SOH
ADMINISTRATIVE Unit Pointer(s)
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0* *
B1 E1 F1
D1
D2
D3
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
RSOH
MSOH
9rows
9 bytes
X Bytes reserved for nationaluse
* Unscrambled bytes
Media dependent bytes
Note: All unmarked bytes are reserved forfuture international standardization(for media dependent,additional national useand other purpose).
Serial1
Serial2
Serial4
Serial3
STM-4 SOHFigure 15-4 shows the structure of STM-4 SOH.
15 Basic PrinciplesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
15-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Figure 15-4 STM-4 SOH
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0 Z0 Z0* * * * * * * *
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
***
9Rows
36 bytes
RSOH
MSOH
Administrative Unit Pointer(s) AU-PTR
X Bytes reserved for national use* Unscrambled bytes
NOTE: All unmarked bytes are reserved for future international standardization(for media dependent,additional national use and other purpose).
STM-16 SOHFigure 15-5 shows the structure of STM-16 SOH.
Figure 15-5 STM-16 SOH
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 * * *
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
*Z0*
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 E2
Z2 M1 Z2 Z2
144 bytes
Administrative Unit Pointer(s) AU-PTR9rows
X Bytes reserved for national use
* Unscrambled bytesNOTE: All unmarked bytes are reserved for future international standardization(for media dependent,additional national use and other purpose).
...
STM-64 SOHFigure 15-6 shows the structure of STM-64 SOH.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 15 Basic Principles
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-5
Figure 15-6 STM-64 SOH
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 * * *
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
*Z0*
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 E2
Z2 M1 Z2 Z2
576 bytes
Administrative Unit Pointer(s) AU-PTR9rows
X Bytes reserved for national use
* Unscrambled bytesNote: All unmarked bytes are reserved for future international standardization(for media dependent,additional national use and other purpose).
...
SOH Bytes Description
Table 15-2 SOH bytes description
Byte Description
A1, A2 Framing byte(A1 = F6H, A2 = 28H)
B1 Regenerator section error monitoring BIP-8 byte
B2 Multiplex section error monitoring BIP-24 x N byte
D1, D2, D3 Regenerator section DCC channel byte, 192 kbit/s
D4–D12 Multiplex section DCC channel byte, 576 kbit/s
E1 Regenerator section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
E2 Multiplex section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
F1 User channel byte ( to provide temporary data/voice channel connectionsfor special maintenance purpose )
H1, H2 Administrative unit pointer byte
H3 Negative justification opportunity byte
J0 Regenerator section trace byte
K1, K2 (b1–b5)
Multiplex section automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
K2 (b6–b8) Multiplex section remote defect indication (MS-RDI) byte
M1 Multiplex section remote error indication (MS-REI) byte
S1 (b5–b8) Synchronization status byte
Serial1–4 Broadcast data byte
15 Basic PrinciplesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
15-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Byte Description
Others To be determined in the future
15.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes DescriptionThe POH bytes include higher order path overhead bytes and lower order path overhead bytes.
Higher Order Path Overhead Bytes
Table 15-3 Description of the VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes
Byte Description
J1 Path trace byte
B3 Path BIP-8 byte
C2 Signal label byte
G1 Path status byte
F2, F3 Path user channels byte
H4 Multiframe indicator byte
K3 (b1-b4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
K3 (b5-b8) Spare byte
N1 Network operator byte
Note: The VC-4 POH is located in the first column of the 9-row by 261-column VC-4structure.The VC-4-xc POH is located in the first column of the 9-row by 261 x X-column VC-4-Xcstructure (cascaded by X VC-4s).
Lower Order Path Overhead Bytes
Table 15-4 Description of the VC-12 POH bytes
Byte Description
V5 V5 byte (error checking, signal label and path status)
J2 Path trace byte
N2 Network operator byte
K4 Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 15 Basic Principles
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-7
15.2 Introduction to EthernetThis topic describes the basic Ethernet principles and the frame structure.
15.2.1 Basic TechnologiesThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports the transmission of Ethernet services.
15.2.2 Ethernet Frame StructureThe OSN quipment series support the Ethernet frame structure based on the Ethernet_II, IEEE802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
15.2.1 Basic TechnologiesThe OptiX OSN 9500 supports the transmission of Ethernet services.
Half-Duplex CSMA/CDAccording to the initial design objective of Ethernet, computers and other digital equipment areconnected through a shared physical line. The computers and digital equipment connected inthis way must visit this physical line in the half-duplex mode. Moreover, a mechanism to detectand avoid conflict must be provided to prevent several pieces of equipment contending for theline at the same time. This is so called CSMA/CD.
It works in the following process: A piece of terminal equipment detects the status of the sharedline continuously and transmits data only in the idle status. Otherwise, it will wait until the lineis idle. At this time, if another piece of equipment is transmitting data, the data sent by the twowill inevitably conflict, making the signal on the line unstable. Once detecting the conflict, theterminal equipment stops transmitting data quickly and then sends a succession of interferingpulse. After waiting for a period of time, it sends the data again.
The purpose of sending interfering pulse is to notify other equipment, especially the one sendingdata at the same time, that conflict occurs on the line. The waiting time after detection of conflictis random but increasing gradually.
Full-Duplex Ethernet and Ethernet SwitchIn 1990, the appearance of the 10BAST-T Ethernet based on twisted pair cable is the mostimportant event in the history of Ethernet. Using twisted pair cable as the transmission mediumof Ethernet not only increases flexibility and reduces the cost, but also introduces an efficientoperation mode: full duplex.
In full-duplex mode, the data is transmitted and received simultaneously. Hub, the traditionalnetwork equipment, does not support full-duplex, because inside the hub is a bus, over whichdata is transmitted and received, therefore no way for full-duplex communication. To achievefull-duplex, a new type of equipment must be introduced, namely the switch.
The switch is the same as the hub in appearance. They both have multiple ports, each of whichconnects to terminal equipment and other multiple-port equipment. Instead of a shared bus,inside the switch is a digital cross-connect network, which temporarily connects every terminal,enabling the terminals to transmit data independently. In addition, the switch sets a buffer areafor each port, storing the data transmitted from terminals temporarily, and performs switchingafter idle resources are available. It is the appearance of the switch that changes the original10/100 Mbit/s shared structure to 20/200 Mbit/s exclusive structure, greatly enhancing the
15 Basic PrinciplesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
15-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
transmission efficiency. Moreover, some software can be added to the switch to implementadditional services, such as VLAN, priority, redundant link, and so on.
Auto Negotiation
In practice, Ethernet can transmit data in full duplex mode or half duplex mode at the rate of 10Mbit/s, or 100 Mbit/s, through type 5 twisted pair cable or type 3 twisted pair. If each terminalequipment is configured manually, it will be laborious and unable to be maintained. Autonegotiation emerges as the times requires for addressing this problem.
Through auto negotiation, the equipment at both ends of a physical link selects a transmissionmode automatically by exchanging information. Auto negotiation is based on the Ethernetconnected by twisted pair cable, so only effective for such an Ethernet. The contents of autonegotiation include duplex mode, bit rate, flow control, and so on. If the negotiation passes, theequipment at the both ends of the link will work in the mode negotiated.
15.2.2 Ethernet Frame StructureThe OSN quipment series support the Ethernet frame structure based on the Ethernet_II, IEEE802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
Figure 15-7 shows the Ethernet frame structure of OSN series products.
Figure 15-7 Ethernet frame structure
DestinationMAC FCSDataProtocol typeSource MAC
6 6 2 446-1500
Ethernet_II
DestinationMAC
FCSSource MAC
43-1497
802.3
Ethernet_SNAP
DSAP SSAP CTL1
DestinationMAC FCSSource MAC
38-14920xAA 0xAA CTL OC
3
66 2
26 6
1 1
1 1 1
4
42
Protocollength
Protocollength
Data
DataProtocol type
Unit: byte
15.3 Link AggregationThis topic describes the basic principles and frame structure of link aggregation.
15.3.1 OverviewLink aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one piece ofequipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link.
15.3.2 CharacteristicsLink aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
15.3.3 Link Aggregation Classification
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 15 Basic Principles
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-9
Link aggregation is classified into manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamicaggregation.
15.3.1 OverviewLink aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one piece ofequipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link.
ConceptsThe schematic diagram of link aggregation, see Figure 15-8.
Figure 15-8 Schematic diagram of link aggregation
traffic
15.3.2 CharacteristicsLink aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
Enhancing Link AvailabilityIn link aggregation, links back up each other dynamically. When a link breaks, the other linkscan quickly provide a backup. The switching process takes place within the aggregation. It isunrelated with the other links.
Increasing Link CapacityThe aggregation technology can improve the link transmission capability economically. Withoutupgrading the existing equipment, the user can obtain a data link of larger bandwidth, which isequal to the capacity of a number of physical links. The aggregation module allocates the trafficto different members according to a certain algorithm to realize load balancing at the link level.
15.3.3 Link Aggregation ClassificationLink aggregation is classified into manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamicaggregation.
l Manual aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port does not run the link aggregation controlprotocol (LACP).
l Static aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port runs the LACP.
15 Basic PrinciplesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
15-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
l Dynamic aggregation
The LACP based on IEEE 802.3ad is used.
15.4 QinQ PrincipleThis topic describes the basic principles and frame structure of the QinQ technology.
15.4.1 Introduction to QinQThe QinQ technology is a VLAN stacking technology, which conforms to the recommendationfor S-VLAN in IEEE 802.1ad and is an expansion of the VLAN technology that complies withIEEE 802.1q.
15.4.2 QinQ Data Frame StructureThe QinQ data frame structure involves the VLAN tag types, including S-VLAN and C-VLAN.
15.4.1 Introduction to QinQThe QinQ technology is a VLAN stacking technology, which conforms to the recommendationfor S-VLAN in IEEE 802.1ad and is an expansion of the VLAN technology that complies withIEEE 802.1q.
Advantages of the QinQ technology are as follows:
l Expands VLAN and alleviates VLAN resource insufficiency. For example, a VLANproviding 4096 VLAN IDs can provide 4096 x 4096 VLANs after VLAN stacking.
l Extends LAN service to WAN, connecting the client network to the carrier network andsupporting transparent transmission.
15.4.2 QinQ Data Frame StructureThe QinQ data frame structure involves the VLAN tag types, including S-VLAN and C-VLAN.
VLAN Tag Types
IEEE 802.1ad defines two VLAN tag types, as shown in Figure 15-9.
l Customer VLAN tag, defined as C-VLAN
l Server layer VLAN tag, defined as S-VLAN
Figure 15-9 QinQ data frame structure
DestinationMAC
SourceMAC S-VLAN lable C-VLAN lable Length/type Data FCS
6 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes
The maximum length of the frame is determined by the port attribute settings of the equipment.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 15 Basic Principles
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15-11
Structure of S-VLAN and C-VLANThe 4-byte S-VLAN and C-VLAN tags can be further divided into two parts: TPID and TCI,each of which has two bytes.
l TPID
TPID indicates the type of the VLAN tag. The TPID of C-VLAN is fixed to 0X8100 and thatof S-VLAN is configurable, as shown in Table 15-5.
Table 15-5 TPID settings
Tag type Name ID
C-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Tag Protocol Type (802.1Q TagType) 0X8100
S-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Service Tag Type (802.1Q S Tag Type) Configurable
C-VLAN tag (C-TAG) is used to identify customer VLAN and is used on VLAN Bridge andPEB equipment.S-VLAN tag (S-TAG) is used to identify server VLAN and is used on PB and PEB equipment.
l TCI
The TCI structure of S-TAG is basically the same as that of C-TAG, as shown in Figure15-10 and Figure 15-11. VLAN ID (VID) is still 12 bits, ranging from 0 to 4095. The differenceis that S-TAG introduces the concept of Drop Eligible (DE). Priority code point (PCP), usedwith DE, indicates the priority of S-TAG frame.
Figure 15-10 C-TAG TCI structure
Octets:
Bits:
PCP CFI VID
1 2
8 6 5 4 1 8 1
Figure 15-11 S-TAG TCI structure
Octets:
Bits:
PCP DE VID
1 2
8 6 5 4 1 8 1
15 Basic PrinciplesOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
15-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
16 Glossary
Numerics
1:N protection A 1:1 protection architecture has n channels of normal traffic signals, thatis, n working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It can transmitextra traffic.
1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one workingSNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.
10BASE-T The specification of the 10 Mbit/s CSMA/CD local area network basedon two pairs of twisted cables at the physical layer.
100BASE-TX The specification of the 1000 Mbit/s CSMA/CD local area network basedon two pairs of category-5 UTP or STP cables at the physical layer.
100BASE-T The specification of the 100 Mbit/s CSMA/CD local area network at thephysical layer.
A
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all, orsome subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal.The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from(extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
AIS Alarm Indication Signal. A signal sent downstream in a digital networkif an upstream failure has been detected and persists for a certain time.
Alarm inputinterface
An interface used to input alarm signals.
Alarm outputinterface
An interface used to output alarm signals.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 16 Glossary
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-1
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network (ASON). ASON is a sort ofintelligent optical network. The service request can be launched by theclient dynamically, and the system will automatically search route andestablish/disconnect service connection through signaling control. Itintegrates switching and transmission, and becomes a new generation ofoptical network.
B
Bandwidth The value that is numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which themagnitude of the baseband transfer function of an optical fiber decreasesto a specified fraction, generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical), of thezero frequency value.NOTE - The bandwidth is limited by several mechanisms: mainly modaldistortion and chromatic dispersion in multi-mode fibers.
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply thatminimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office.Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
C
Control plane A set of communicating entities that is responsible for the establishmentof connections including set-up, release, supervision and maintenance. Acontrol plane is supported by a signaling network.
D
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module. DCM is a module, which containsdispersion compensation fibers to compensate the positive dispersion oftransmitting fiber.
DNI Dual Node Interconnection. Both ring networks have two nodesinterconnected with each other. DNI not only provides protection for ring-cross services but also for either failed node of two interconnected nodes.Therefore, it improves network availability.
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. DWDM technology utilizesthe characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single modeoptical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with spacing of 100GHz or50GHz as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmitsimultaneously in the same fiber.
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operationschannel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel(DCC) as its physical layer.
16 GlossaryOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
16-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers.It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several differentphysical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernetusually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernetnetworks.
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
Fan trayassembly
A tray with a set of fans which is used for heat dissipation.
Free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is stronglyinfluenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a networkreference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no accessto stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected externalreference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects theinfluence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an externalreference.
I
Intelligentservice
Intelligent service between the user and the transmission network isconfigured directly by the T2000. The service within the transmissionnetwork is requested by the T2000 and then created by the control planeof an NE through signaling.
L
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. A solution features flexiblebandwidth and dynamic adjustment. In addition, it provides a failuretolerance mechanism, which enhances the viability of virtualconcatenations and enables the dynamic adjustment to bandwidth (non-service affecting).
Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fiber can be located by settingloopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopbackmodes: Noloop, Outloop, and Inloop.
M
MSP Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides capability forswitching a signal from a working to a protection section.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 16 Glossary
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-3
MSTP Multi-service transmission platform. It is based on the SDH platform,capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATMservices, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management ofthese services.
Multiplexer An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto afewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between thetributary and aggregate channels being fixed.
O
Orderwire It establishes the voice communication among the operators andmaintenance engineers work in each working station.
Overheadinformation
Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may betransferred by an optical network layer but which does not by necessityhave to be associated with a particular connection. An example of suchan auxiliary channel is a data communications channel for the purposesof transferring management data between management entities. NOTE -These management entities are not trail termination and adaptationfunctions.
R
Receiveroverload
Receiver overload is the maximum acceptable value of the receivedaverage power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.
Receiversensitivity
Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value ofaverage received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that theamplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrainedwithin specified limits.
S
S1 byte To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, theNE must learn about the clock quality information of the clock referencesource it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit the networksynchronization status information.
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transportstructures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloadsover physical transmission networks.
SLA Service Level Agreement. A negotiated agreement between an end userand the service provider. Its significance varies depending on the serviceofferings. The SLA may include a number of attributes such as, but notlimited to, traffic contract, availability, performance, encryption,authentication, pricing and billing mechanism.
16 GlossaryOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
16-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
SNCP SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connectionis replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the workingsubnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a requiredlevel.
SSM Synchronization Status Message. ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit thenetwork synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits ofthe multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types ofsynchronization quality grades.
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module. An STM is the information structureused to support section layer connections in the SDH. It consists ofinformation payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fieldsorganized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 ms. Theinformation is suitably conditioned for serial transmission on the selectedmedia at a rate which is synchronized to the network. A basic STM isdefined at 155.520 kbit/s.
T
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Common name for thesuite of protocols developed to support the construction of worldwideinternetworks.
V
Virtualconcatenation
It is the payload whose transmission bandwidth is bigger than VC-4. Itcombines multiple VC-4 payloads (successive or non-successive) to forma virtual large structure VC-4-Xv in concatenation mode for transmission.
W
Wander The long-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal fromtheir ideal position in time (where long-term implies that these variationsare of frequency less than 10 Hz).
Working path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 16 Glossary
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16-5
17 Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU Administrative Unit
APS Automatic Protection Switch
AM Administration Module
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ASTN Automatically Switched Transport Network
B
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply system
BOM Bill of Material
BIOS Basic Input/Output System
BER Bit Error Rate
C
CMM Capability Maturity Model
CPU Central Processing Unit
CM Configuration Management
CR-LDP Constrained Route - Label Distribution Protocol
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
D
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 17 Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-1
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCG Dispersion Compensation Grating
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit
DIP Dual-In-line Package
DLAG Distributed Link Aggregation Group
DNI Dual Node Interconnection
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
DXC Digital Cross Connect System
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility
EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference
EMPU Electromechanical Information Processing Board
EN End Node
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GMPLS Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching
GND Ground
17 Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
17-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
H
HDLC High level Data Link Control;
HP Higher Order Path
HPT Higher Order Path Termination
I
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IP Internet Protocol
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationStandardization Sector
ION Intelligent Optical Network
L
LAN Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LMP Link Management Protocol
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOP Loss of Pointer
LOS Loss Of Signal
M
MADM Multi Add and Drop Multiplexer
MAN Metropolitan-Area Network
MBUS Maintenance BUS
MCF Message Communication Function
MESH Mesh
MLM Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
MPI-R Main Path Interface at the Receiver
MPI-S Main Path Interface at the Transmitter
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 17 Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-3
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP Multiplexer Section Protection
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MSTP Multi-Service Transmission Platform
N
NA Network Address
NNI Network Network Interface
NRZ Non Return to Zero code
O
OAM&P Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision
OCS Optical Core Switching
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
OIF Optical Internetworking Forum
OOF Out of Frame
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSN Optical Switch Node
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OTN Optical Transmission Network
OVPN Optical Virtual Private Network
P
PGND Protection Ground
PHY Physical Sublayer & Physical Layer
PIU Power Interface Unit
POH Path Overhead
POS Packet Over SDH
PWM Pulse-Width Modulation
R
RDI Remote Defect Indication
17 Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Product Description
17-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2008-12-20)
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RSVP-TE RSVP with Traffic Engineering extensions
S
SBS Synchronous Information Backbone System
SCC System Control & Communication Unit
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SLA Service Level Agreement
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNCTP Sub-Network Connection Tunnel Protection
SOH Section Overhead
SPI SDH physical interface
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STG Synchronous Timing Generator
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
STM-16 SDH Transport Module -16
STM-4 SDH Transport Module -4
STM-64 SDH Transport Module -64
T
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group
OptiX OSN 9500 Intelligent Optical Switching SystemProduct Description 17 Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 01 (2008-12-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17-5